SlideShare a Scribd company logo
1 of 85
Download to read offline
1
ِ‫ﻢ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﺣ‬
‫ﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ ِ‫ﻦ‬‫ﻤـ‬‫ﺣ‬
‫ﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ ِ‫ﻪ‬‫ﹼ‬
‫ﻠ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ ِ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺴ‬ِ‫ﺑ‬
Arabic Grammar Rules for Madeenah Book One

‫ﺕ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻛ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬
ُ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﺛ‬‫ﱠﻼ‬
‫ﺜ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬
The three vowel markings
ٌ‫ﺔ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻓ‬
fathah َ-
‫ﺔ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﺿ‬
ٌ
-
ُ
hdhamma
‫ﹲ‬
‫ﺓ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻛ‬
kasrah ِ-
(a)
(u)
(i)
‫ﹲ‬
‫ﻥ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﹸ‬
‫ﻜ‬
‫ﺳ‬
-
ْ
Sukoon
‫ﹲ‬
‫ﺓ‬
‫ﺪ‬‫ﺷ‬
-
ّ
shaddah

‫ﻦ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﻮ‬‫ﻨ‬
‫ﺘ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬
:
at-tanween
ِ‫ﻥ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻓ‬
-
ً
fathataan
-
(an)
ِ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺘ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﺿ‬
ٌ-
dhammataan
-
(un)
ِ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺗ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻛ‬
- kasrataan ٍ-
(in)
When vowel markings are doubled at the end of a word they are called

‫ﻦ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﻮ‬‫ﻨ‬‫ﺗ‬ (tanween). The additional vowel at the end of a word represents a ‫ﹾ‬‫ﻥ‬
(noon saakinah). The ‫ﹾ‬‫ﻥ‬ is not written but is only pronounced. e.g.
‫ﹾ‬‫ﻥ‬
‫ﺪ‬ِ‫ﺠ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ﻣ‬ -ٌ ‫ِﺪ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ﻣ‬
2
The Arabic language is made up of 
‫ﺕ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻤ‬ِ‫ﻠ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻛ‬ (words) and these words are
of three types they are known as:

‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬
-
Particle
/
Letter ‫ﹲ‬
‫ﻞ‬‫ﻌ‬ِ‫ﻓ‬
-
Action
/
Verb 
‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬
-
Noun

‫ﺖ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﺑ‬
-
house
‫ﺐ‬‫ﻫ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬
-
went
,
/
to go
‫ِﱃ‬‫ﺇ‬
-
to
‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻤ‬
‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬
ُ
:
ٍ‫ﺖ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﺑ‬ ‫ﹶﻰ‬‫ﻟ‬ِ‫ﺇ‬ ‫ﺐ‬‫ﻫ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬
He went to a house
:
ceSenten
The table below shows the properties of an 
‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬ (noun):
Examples Translation Properties
ٌ‫ﺔ‬‫ﺒ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻃ‬ ،
‫ﺐ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻃ‬ Masculine, feminine
‫ﹲ‬
‫ﺚ‬
‫ﻧ‬‫ﺆ‬
‫ﻣ‬ ،
‫ﺮ‬‫ﱠ‬
‫ﻛ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺬ‬
‫ﻣ‬

‫ﺏ‬‫ﱠﺎ‬
‫ﻠ‬‫ﹸ‬
‫ﻃ‬ ،ِ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺒ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻃ‬ ،
‫ﺐ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻃ‬ Singular, dual, plural

‫ﻊ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﺟ‬ ،‫ﻰ‬
‫ﻨ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺜ‬
‫ﻣ‬ ،
‫ﺩ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬
‫ﻣ‬

‫ﺖ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﺑ‬ ،
‫ﺐ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻃ‬ Intellect, non-intellect
ٍ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻗ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻋ‬ 
‫ﺮ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻏ‬ ،‫ﹲ‬
‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻗ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻋ‬

‫ﺐ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﱠﺎ‬
‫ﻄ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ ،
‫ﺐ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻃ‬ Indefinite, definite
‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻓ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﻣ‬ ،‫ﹲ‬
‫ﺓ‬‫ﺮ‬ِ‫ﻜ‬‫ﻧ‬
ٌ
‫ﹲ‬
‫ﺓ‬‫ﺮ‬ِ‫ﻜ‬‫ﻧ‬ is when an ism is indefinite or not specific, it is general i.e., the ism

‫ﺏ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺘ‬ِ‫ﻛ‬ ‘a book’ this can be any book from the different types of books.
‫ﻌ‬‫ﻣ‬
‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻓ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬
ٌ is when an ism is definite or specific, it is not general i.e., the ism

‫ﺏ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺘ‬ِ‫ﻜ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‘the book’ or 
‫ﺏ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺘ‬ِ‫ﻛ‬
ٍ‫ﺪ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﺤ‬
‫ﻣ‬ ‘Muhammad’s book’, here the book is
a particular book not just any book in general.
An ism in the Arabic language can be ‫ﻰ‬
‫ﻨ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺜ‬
‫ﻣ‬ (dual) meaning it shows upon
two i.e., the ism ِ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺒ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻃ‬ means ‘two students’ this is done by adding ِ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺍ‬
(alif and noon)at the end of an ism.
3
An ism can be ‫ﹲ‬
‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻗ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻋ‬ possess intellect such as humans, angels and jinns or
it can be ٍ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻗ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻋ‬
‫ﺮ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻏ‬ possess no intellect such as animals, objects, trees e.t.c.
The ‫ﹲ‬
‫ﻞ‬‫ﺻ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺃ‬ (Asl) origin of an ism is that it carries ِ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺘ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﺿ‬ ٌ
- ‘two dhammas’
(tanween) on the last letter of the word. The tanween generally is also a
sign showing that the ism is ‫ﹲ‬
‫ﺓ‬‫ﺮ‬ِ‫ﻜ‬‫ﻧ‬ (indefinite), however there is an
exception to this because you will find that Arabic male names
such as 
‫ﺱ‬‫ﺎ‬
‫ﺒ‬‫ﻋ‬،
‫ﺪ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﺤ‬
‫ﻣ‬ accept tanween but they are ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻓ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﻣ‬
ٌ (definite).
The tanween is the Arabic indefinite article corresponding to the English
‘a’/ ‘an’.
4

‫ﺪ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬

‫ﺱ‬‫ﺭ‬
‫ﹸ‬
‫ﻝ‬
‫ﻭ‬َ‫ﻷ‬‫ﺍ‬
(١)
‫ﻫ‬
‫ﹶ‬‫ﺬ‬
‫ﹾ‬‫ﺍ‬

‫ﺖ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﺑ‬
is a house
This
‫ﹾ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻫ‬
-
ِ‫ﻪ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﺒ‬‫ﻨ‬
‫ﺘ‬‫ِﻠ‬‫ﻟ‬ 
‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬
Letter to bring to attention or alert

‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬
ِ‫ﻪ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﺒ‬‫ﻨ‬
‫ﺘ‬‫ِﻠ‬‫ﻟ‬ is a letter that is used to alert or to bring to attention the
person who is being addressed and it is mostly connected to ِ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺷ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ ُ
‫ﺀ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﺳ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺃ‬
(nouns of indication).
‫ﹾ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬
-
ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ 
‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬
ِ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺷ‬
noun of indication
‫ﹾ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬ is pronounced as ‫ﹶﺍ‬‫ﺫ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻫ‬, but it is written without the first alif.
The ِ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺷ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ 
‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬ is used to point or indicate to people, animals, objects
things which can be felt or touched and can also indicate to things that
have meaning such as 
‫ﻱ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﺃ‬‫ﺭ‬ ‘opinion’ or 
‫ﻢ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ‫ﻋ‬ ‘knowledge’.
‫ﹾ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬

‫ﻢ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ‫ﻋ‬

‫ﻊ‬ِ‫ﻓ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻧ‬
This is beneficial knowledge
5
The table below shows the properties of the 
‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬
ِ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺷ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬
)
‫ﹾ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬
(
Indicates,points to ‫ﹸ‬
‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺷ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬
‫ﹶﻰ‬‫ﻟ‬ِ‫ﺇ‬
the near

‫ﺐ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻘ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬
The masculine

‫ﺮ‬‫ﱠ‬
‫ﻛ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺬ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬
the singular

‫ﺩ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﹸ‬
‫ﻔ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬
The 
‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬
ِ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺷ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ is ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻓ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﻣ‬
ٌ (definite).
It can be used to indicate or point to those possessing intellect ‫ﻋ‬
‫ﹲ‬
‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻗ‬‫ﺎ‬ or
things that do not possess intellect ٍ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻗ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻋ‬
‫ﺮ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻏ‬.
‫ﺎ‬‫ﻣ‬
-

‫ﻡ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻬ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬ِ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺇ‬ 
‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬
Interrogative or Questioning Noun
The Interrogative Noun ‘‫ﺎ‬‫ﻣ‬’ is used to ask a question about something
that does not possess intellect ٍ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻗ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻋ‬
‫ﺮ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻏ‬ and it always comes at the
beginning of a sentence. When a word comes at the beginning of a
sentence it is called in Arabic ِ‫ﺔ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻤ‬
‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬
‫ﺭ‬‫ﺪ‬‫ﺻ‬.
‫ﺎ‬‫ﻣ‬
‫ﹶﺍ‬‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬
‫؟‬
?
is this
What
‫ﹶ‬‫ﺃ‬
-

‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬
ِ‫ﻡ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻬ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬ِ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬
،
‫ﹸ‬
‫ﺓ‬‫ﺰ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﻫ‬
ِ‫ﻡ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻬ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬ِ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬
Particle/Letter of interrogation or questioning or also known as the
Interrogative Hamzah.
The ‫ﹸ‬
‫ﺓ‬‫ﺰ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﻫ‬
ِ‫ﻡ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻬ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬ِ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ comes at the beginning of the sentence as do all the
nouns or particles of questioning. It can be used to ask a question about
those possessing intellect as well as the things that do not possess
intellect.
6
‫ﹶ‬‫ﺃ‬
‫ﹶﺍ‬‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬
‫؟‬
‫ﺖ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﺑ‬
?
this a house
Is
‫ﹶ‬‫ﺃ‬
‫ﹶﺍ‬‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬
‫؟‬
‫ﺪ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﻭ‬
Is this a boy?
‫ﻢ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﻧ‬
-
ٍ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﺟ‬ 
‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬
Letter of answer or reply
‫ﻻ‬
-

‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬
ٍ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﺟ‬
ِ‫ﻭ‬
ٍ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻔ‬‫ﻧ‬
Letter/particle of answer and negation
The particle of reply ‫ﻢ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﻧ‬ is used to reply to a question with affirmation
whereas the particle ‫ﻻ‬ is used to reply to a question with negation.
‫ﹶ‬‫ﺃ‬
‫ﹶﺍ‬‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬
‫؟‬
‫ﻢ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻗ‬
Is this a pen?

‫ﻢ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻗ‬ ‫ﹶﺍ‬‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬،‫ﻢ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﻧ‬
.
Yes this is a pen
‫؟‬
‫ﺺ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻗ‬ ‫ﹶﺍ‬‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬ ‫ﹶ‬‫ﺃ‬
Is this a shirt?

‫ﻢ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻗ‬ ‫ﹶﺍ‬‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬،‫ﻻ‬
‫؟‬
No, this is a pen.
‫ﻦ‬‫ﻣ‬
–
ِ‫ﻡ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻬ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬ِ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ 
‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬
Noun of interrogation/questioning
This interrogative noun is used to ask a question about those who possess
intellect ‫ﹲ‬
‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻗ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻋ‬
‫ﻦ‬‫ﻣ‬
‫ﹸ؟‬
‫ﻞ‬
‫ﺟ‬
‫ﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ‬
Who is this man?
‫؟‬
-
‫ﻋ‬
‫ﻬ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬ِ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ ُ‫ﺔ‬‫ﻣ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻠ‬
‫ﺎﻡ‬
ِ
Question mark
7
)
٢
(
‫ِﻲ‬‫ﻧ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﺜ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ 
‫ﺱ‬‫ﺭ‬
‫ﺪ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬
‫ﻚ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬
-
ِ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ِﺷﺎ‬‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ 
‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬
Noun of indication/pointing
‫ﻭ‬ 
‫ﺖ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﺑ‬ ‫ﺬﺍ‬‫ﻫ‬
‫ﻚ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬

‫ﺪ‬ِ‫ﺠ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ﻣ‬
is a mosque
that
This is a house and
‫ﻚ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬ is a noun of indication it is used to indicate/point to objects or people
that are distant or far. ‫ﻚ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬ can be broken down into three parts:
‫ﹶﺍ‬‫ﺫ‬
-
ِ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ِﺷﺎ‬‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ 
‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬
Noun of indication
ِ‫ﻝ‬
–
‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬ 
‫ﻡ‬‫ﹶﻟﻼ‬‫ﺍ‬
ِ‫ﻌ‬
ِ‫ﺪ‬
The laam is for the far/distant
‫ﻙ‬
-

‫ﺏ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻄ‬ِ‫ﺧ‬ 
‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬
Particle of address
Some of the grammarians say that the ‘‫ﻙ‬’ particle of address also
indicates upon far/distant and the ‘ِ‫ﻝ‬’ shows upon even more or
increased furtherness/distance.
The letter/particle of address ‘‫ﻙ‬’ is used if the person or object we are
addressing is masculine.
8
The table below shows the properties of ‫ﻚ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬:
Indicates,points to ‫ﹸ‬
‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺷ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬
‫ﹶﻰ‬‫ﻟ‬ِ‫ﺇ‬
The far/distant

‫ﺪ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻌ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬
The masculine

‫ﺮ‬‫ﱠ‬
‫ﻛ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺬ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬
the singular

‫ﺩ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﹸ‬
‫ﻔ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬
All the ِ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺷ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ ُ
‫ﺀ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﺳ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺃ‬ nouns of indication are ٌ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻓ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﻣ‬ definite.
‫ﻚ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬ is pronounced ‫ﻚ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶﺍ‬‫ﺫ‬ but is written without the alif.
Some of the grammarians say that the ِ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺷ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ ُ
‫ﺀ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﺳ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺃ‬ have three levels
‫ﺐ‬ِ‫ﺗ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻣ‬ ‫ﹸ‬
‫ﺙ‬‫ﺛﻼ‬ :
‫ﹶﺍ‬‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬
–
ِ‫ﺐ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻘ‬‫ِﻠ‬‫ﻟ‬
For the near/close
‫ﻚ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬
-
ِ‫ﺪ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻌ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬
For the far/distant
‫ﻙ‬‫ﹶﺍ‬‫ﺫ‬
-
ِ‫ﻂ‬‫ﺳ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬
For the middle between near and far
‫ﻻ‬

‫ﻊ‬ِِ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﻳ‬
ِ‫ﺪ‬‫ﻌ‬
‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ 
‫ﻡ‬‫ﻻ‬‫ﻭ‬ ِ‫ﻪ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﺒ‬‫ﻨ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ِﻠ‬‫ﻟ‬ ‫ﺎ‬‫ﻫ‬
The particle of alert/bringing to attention and the laam indicating upon
the distant or far will never come together in a noun of indication i.e;
‫ﻚ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻫ‬-this is wrong ‘‫ﹲ‬
‫ﺄ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻄ‬‫ﺧ‬’.
9
)
٣
(
‫ﹶ‬‫ﺜ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ 
‫ﺱ‬‫ﺭ‬
‫ﺪ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬
‫ﹸ‬
‫ﺚ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﺎ‬
‫ﹾ‬‫ﻝ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬
-
‫ﻌ‬‫ﺗ‬ 
‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬

‫ﻒ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬
(al) Definite Particle
The definite particle ‫ﹾ‬‫ﻝ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ is prefixed to an ism which is ‫ﹲ‬
‫ﺓ‬‫ﺮ‬ِ‫ﻜ‬‫ﻧ‬ (indefinite)
and it causes it to become ٌ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻓ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﻣ‬ (definite), and it also causes the tanween
at the end to be dropped. The definite particle (al) corresponds to the
English ‘the’.
‫ﹶﺍ‬‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬
ٌ َِْ
.
doctor
a
This is
‫ﺍ‬

‫ﺐ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﺒ‬‫ﱠ‬
‫ﻄ‬‫ﻟ‬
ٌ
ِ
َ

.
doctor is sitting
The
The Arabic alphabet consists of 28 letters. Of these 14 are called Solar
Letters ُ ‫ﺔ‬
‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﺴ‬‫ﻤ‬
‫ﺸ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ 
‫ﻑ‬‫ﻭ‬
‫ﺮ‬
‫ﺤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬, and the other 14 are called Lunar Letters
ُ‫ﺔ‬
‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻘ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ 
‫ﻑ‬‫ﻭ‬
‫ﺮ‬
‫ﺤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ .
In the articulation of the Solar Letters the tip or the blade of the tongue is
involved in the pronunciation. The tip or the blade of the tongue does not
play any part in the articulation of the Lunar Letters, (refer to lesson 3,
pg.19 Madinah bk.1).
When ‫ﹾ‬‫ﻝ‬‫ﺍ‬ is prefixed to an ism beginning with a Solar Letter the laam of
‘al’ is not pronounced but is written, and the first letter of the ism takes a
shaddah –
ّ . For example, 
‫ﺲ‬‫ﻤ‬
‫ﺸ‬‫ﹶﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ (ash-shamsu).
When ‫ﹾ‬‫ﻝ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ is prefixed to an ism beginning with a Lunar Letter the laam of
‘al’ is pronounced and written. For example, 
‫ﺮ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻘ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ (al-qamaru).
In the definite particle ‫ﹾ‬‫ﻝ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ (al) the ‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ (a) is known as ِ‫ﻞ‬‫ﺻ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﹸ‬
‫ﺓ‬‫ﺰ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﻫ‬ the
Connecting Hamzah. If it is not preceded by a word it will be
10
pronounced with the vowel marking َ- (fathah). If it is preceded by a
word it is dropped in pronunciation, though remains in writing.
‫ﹲ‬
‫ﻝ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﺜ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬
:

‫ﺲ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺟ‬ 
‫ﺐ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻄ‬‫ﱠ‬
‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬

‫ﺱ‬
‫ﺭ‬‫ﺪ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﻭ‬

‫ﻒ‬ِ‫ﻗ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﻭ‬
The student is sitting and the
teacher is standing, (wa l-mudarrisu…).
‫ﺔ‬
‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ُﺍ‬‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻤ‬
‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬
ُ is a beneficial sentence )
‫ﹲ‬
‫ﺓ‬‫ﺪ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻔ‬
‫ﻣ‬ٌ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻤ‬
‫ﺟ‬
( , and it is made up of
2 parts known as ‫ﺍ‬

‫ﺮ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﺨ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﻭ‬ ُ‫ﺃ‬‫ﺪ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺒ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬َ(al-mubtada wa l-khabar).
‫ﺃ‬‫ﺪ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺒ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬
(1) ‫ﺃ‬‫ﺪ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺒ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ is from the Arabic word ُ
‫ﺀ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﺪ‬ِ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺑ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ meaning the beginning or
starting, and from its origin is that it comes at the beginning of the
sentence.
(2) ‫ﺪ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺒ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬
‫ﺃ‬ is an ism that is the subject of talk or discussion.
(3) ‫ﺪ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺒ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬
‫ﺃ‬ is 
‫ﻉ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﹸ‬
‫ﻓ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻣ‬ (marfoo’) meaning it takes a dhammah or dhammataan
on the last letter of the ism.
(4) ‫ﺪ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺒ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬
‫ﺃ‬ in its ‫ﹲ‬
‫ﻞ‬‫ﺻ‬‫ﺃ‬ (origin) precedes 
‫ﺮ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﺨ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ (the khabar).
(5) ‫ﺃ‬‫ﺪ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺒ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ in its ‫ﹲ‬
‫ﻞ‬‫ﺻ‬‫ﺃ‬ (origin) is ٌ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻓ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﻣ‬ (definite).
ُ‫ﺔ‬
‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ ُ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻤ‬
‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬
‫ﺒ‬‫ﺨ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬

‫ﺮ‬ ‫ﺃ‬‫ﺪ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺒ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬
ُ
11

‫ﺮ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﺨ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬
(1) 
‫ﺮ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﺨ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ is that which comes after ‫ﺪ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺒ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬
‫ﺃ‬ in its ‫ﹲ‬
‫ﻞ‬‫ﺻ‬‫ﺃ‬ (origin).
(2) 
‫ﺮ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﺨ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ gives information or news about ‫ﺃ‬‫ﺪ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺒ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬, and by which it
completes a benefit with ‫ﺃ‬‫ﺪ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺒ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬.
(3) 
‫ﺮ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﺨ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ in its ‫ﹲ‬
‫ﻞ‬‫ﺻ‬‫ﺃ‬ (origin) is ‫ﹲ‬
‫ﺓ‬‫ﺮ‬ِ‫ﻜ‬‫ﻧ‬ (indefinite).
(4) 
‫ﺮ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﺨ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ is 
‫ﻉ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﹸ‬
‫ﻓ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻣ‬ (marfoo’) meaning it takes a dhammah or dhammataan
on the last letter of the ism.
ُ‫ﺔ‬
‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ُﺍ‬‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻤ‬
‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬

‫ﺪ‬ِ‫ﺠ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬

‫ﺐ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻗ‬
The mosque is near.
‫ﺃ‬‫ﺪ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺒ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬

‫ﺮ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﺨ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬
12
(٤)

‫ﻊ‬ِ‫ﺑ‬‫ﺍ‬
‫ﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ 
‫ﺱ‬‫ﺭ‬
‫ﺪ‬‫ﹶﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬

‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ 
‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬

‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬

‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬
)
1
( is a Letter/Particle that enters upon an ism only.
(2) 
‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬

‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ changes the state of the ism to 
‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﻣ‬

‫ﺭ‬‫ﻭ‬ (majroor), meaning
the ism takes kasrah/kasrataan on the last letter.
(3) 
‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬

‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ can have many meanings and its meaning is not known or
complete until it enters upon a sentence. Then its exact meaning is
known from the context of the sentence.

‫ﻉ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﹸ‬
‫ﻓ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻣ‬

‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ 
‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬

‫ﺖ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬
ِ‫ﺖ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻓ‬

‫ﺭ‬‫ﻭ‬
‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﻣ‬

‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬

‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬
-
Particle of Jarr
‫ﻦ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬
From- ‫ﹶﻰ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻋ‬
On/Above- ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻓ‬
-
In
13

‫ﺪ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﺤ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻓ‬
ِ‫ﺖ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬
the house
in
Muhammad is
‫ﻦ‬‫ﻳ‬‫ﺃ‬
–

‫ﻡ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻬ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬ِ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬ 
‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬
ِ‫ﻥ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻜ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬
Noun of Questioning f
or Place

‫ﻡ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻬ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬ِ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬ 
‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬
ِ‫ﻥ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻜ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬ is an ism which is used to ask a question about the
whereabouts of someone/something.
‫ﻦ‬‫ﻳ‬‫ﺃ‬
‫؟‬
‫ﺏ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺘ‬ِ‫ﻜ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬
?
is the book
Where
‫ﻮ‬
‫ﻫ‬
‫ِ؟‬‫ﺐ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻜ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﹶﻰ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻋ‬
It is on the desk/table?
‫ﹸ‬
‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﺼ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﻨ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬
‫ﺮ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻤ‬
‫ﻀ‬‫ﹶﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬-Detached Pronoun
(1) ‫ﹸ‬
‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﺼ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﻨ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬
‫ﺮ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻤ‬
‫ﻀ‬‫ﹶﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ is a type of ism that is used to indicate upon the 
‫ﺏ‬ِ‫ﺀ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻏ‬
(Absent), or the 
‫ﺐ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻃ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺨ‬
‫ﻣ‬ (Addressed), or the 
‫ﻢ‬‫ﱠ‬
‫ﻠ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻜ‬‫ﺘ‬
‫ﻣ‬ (Speaker).
(2) ‫ﹸ‬
‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﺼ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﻨ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬
‫ﺮ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻤ‬
‫ﻀ‬‫ﹶﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ you can begin a sentence with it.
‫ﹸ‬
‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﺼ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﻨ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬
‫ﺮ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻤ‬
‫ﻀ‬‫ﹶﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬
‫ﺎ‬‫ﻧ‬‫ﺃ‬
-
I ِ‫ﺖ‬‫ﻧ‬‫ﺃ‬
-
You ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻫ‬
-
It
/
She ‫ﻮ‬
‫ﻫ‬
-
He/It
‫ﺖ‬‫ﻧ‬‫ﺃ‬
-
You
14
(3) ‫ﹸ‬
‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﺼ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﻨ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬
‫ﺮ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻤ‬
‫ﻀ‬‫ﹶﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ is a type of a ‫ﺃ‬‫ﺪ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺒ‬
‫ﻣ‬
(4) ‫ﹸ‬
‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﺼ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﻨ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬
‫ﺮ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻤ‬
‫ﻀ‬‫ﹶﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ is ٌ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻓ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﻣ‬ (definite).
5) The dhameer ‫ﻮ‬
‫ﻫ‬ and ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻫ‬ can be used for those who possess intellect
and things that do not possess intellect. If they are used for the latter they
will have the meaning ‘it’.
‫ﻦ‬‫ﻳ‬‫ﺃ‬
‫ُ؟‬‫ﺔ‬‫ﺷ‬ِ‫ﺀ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻋ‬
Where is ‘Aaisha?
‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻫ‬
ِ‫ﺔ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻓ‬‫ﺮ‬
‫ﻐ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻓ‬
is in the room
She
‫ﻦ‬‫ﻳ‬‫ﺃ‬
‫ُ؟‬‫ﺔ‬‫ﻋ‬‫ﺎ‬
‫ﺴ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬
Where is the watch?
‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻫ‬
ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬
‫ﺴ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ ‫ﹶﻰ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻋ‬
bed
is on the
It
15
The table below shows the properties of ُ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ‫ﺼ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﻨ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ 
‫ﺭ‬ِ‫ﺀ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻤ‬
‫ﻀ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ (the Detached
Pronouns):

‫ﺩ‬‫ﺪ‬‫ﻋ‬
Number

‫ﺲ‬‫ﻨ‬ِ‫ﺟ‬
Gender
‫ﱡ‬
‫ﻝ‬
‫ﺪ‬‫ﻳ‬
‫ﹶﻰ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻋ‬
Indicates upon
‫ﹸ‬
‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﺼ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﻨ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬
‫ﺮ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻤ‬
‫ﻀ‬‫ﹶﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬
Detached Pronoun

‫ﺩ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬
(1)

‫ﺮ‬‫ﱠ‬
‫ﻛ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺬ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬
Male

‫ﺏ‬ِ‫ﺀ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻐ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬
-
The Absent ‫ﻮ‬
‫ﻫ‬
-
It
/
He
‫ﹸ‬
‫ﺓ‬‫ﺩ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬
(1)
‫ﹸ‬
‫ﺚ‬
‫ﻧ‬‫ﺆ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬
Female
ُ‫ﺔ‬‫ﺑ‬ِ‫ﺀ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻐ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬
-
The Absent ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻫ‬
-
She/It

‫ﺩ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬
(1)
‫ﱠﺮ‬
‫ﻛ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺬ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬
Male

‫ﺐ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻃ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺨ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬
-
The Addressed ‫ﺖ‬‫ﻧ‬‫ﺃ‬
-
You
‫ﹸ‬
‫ﺓ‬‫ﺩ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬
(1)
‫ﹸ‬
‫ﺚ‬
‫ﻧ‬‫ﺆ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬
Female
ُ‫ﺔ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻃ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺨ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬
-
The Addressed ِ‫ﺖ‬‫ﻧ‬‫ﺃ‬
-
You

‫ﺩ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬
(1)

‫ﺮ‬‫ﱠ‬
‫ﻛ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺬ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬
‫ﹸ‬
‫ﺚ‬
‫ﻧ‬‫ﺆ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﻭ‬

‫ﻢ‬‫ﱢ‬
‫ﻠ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻜ‬‫ﺘ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬
-
The Speaker ‫ﺎ‬‫ﻧ‬‫ﺃ‬
-
I/Me
16
ِ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬
‫ﺼ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ ‫ﻦ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬ 
‫ﻉ‬‫ﻮ‬
‫ﻨ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﻣ‬ (Prevented from Tanween) is a Term that is used for a
particular group of nouns which do not accept tanween and when they are
in a state of 
‫ﺭ‬‫ﻭ‬
‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﻣ‬ (kasra) they take Fathah.
This particular group of nouns further divides up into many categories
and from them is the category known in the Arabic language as:
ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﻐ‬ِ‫ﺑ‬ ِ‫ﺚ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻧ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﺄ‬‫ﱠ‬

‫ﺘ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ ‫ﻊ‬‫ﻣ‬ُ‫ﺔ‬
‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬
ٍ‫ﻒ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﺃ‬
Female Names Without Alif
This category contains Female Names which do not accept tanween but
there is a condition '
‫ﹲ‬
‫ﻁ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺷ‬
' for them not accepting tanween and that is, that
the names are made up of more than 3 letters. This category of names is
divided up into into 3 types with regards to their femininity.

‫ﻉ‬‫ﻮ‬
‫ﻨ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﻣ‬
ِ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬
‫ﺼ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ ‫ﻦ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬
‫ﹸ‬
‫ﺓ‬‫ﺰ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﺣ‬ 
‫ﻢ‬‫ﻳ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻣ‬ ‫ﺔ‬‫ﻤ‬ِ‫ﻃ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻓ‬
ُ
17
The ‫ﺓ‬
‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻃ‬‫ﻮ‬
‫ﺑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻣ‬ (Round Taa) is a letter that is added at the end of an ism
and it signifies femininity of a word.
The diagram above shows that there are 3 categories of femininity in
female names without alif:
1) In wording and meaning - names which are feminine in their
wording i.e. they end in taa marboota and in their meaning i.e. they
are names which are used for females.
2) In meaning - names which are used for females but not feminine in
wording.
3) In wording - names which are feminine in wording but not
meaning, they are names which are used for males.
The origin of nouns ending with the ‫ﺓ‬
‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻃ‬‫ﻮ‬
‫ﺑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻣ‬ (Round Taa) is only to
distinguish the feminine from the masculine. And you will mostly find
that with the 
‫ﺕ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻔ‬ِ‫ﺻ‬ (Adjectives) i.e. 
‫ﻢ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻛ‬
/
ٌ‫ﺔ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻛ‬ (Generous, Noble).
ُ
ِْ

‫ا‬
-
Femininity

ِ
َْ

(In)Wording- 
‫ي‬ِ
!َ
ْ#َ
$
(In)Meaning- 
‫ي‬ِ
!َ
ْ#َ
$
َْ
 َ
‫و‬

ِ

-
(In)Meaning and Wording

‫ﺐ‬‫ﻨ‬‫ﻳ‬‫ﺯ‬،
‫ﻢ‬‫ﻳ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻣ‬ ‫ﺔ‬‫ﻨ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬‫ﺁ‬
‫ﺔ‬‫ﻤ‬ِ‫ﻃ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻓ‬،ُ
ُ
‫ﺔ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻃ‬،‫ﹸ‬
‫ﺓ‬‫ﺰ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﺣ‬
ُ
18

‫ﻒ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬
‫ﺘ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬
:
The Definition
‫ﻌ‬ِ‫ﻔ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬
‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﺿ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﹸ‬
‫ﻞ‬
-
ِ‫ﻢ‬‫ﱡ‬
‫ﻠ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻜ‬
‫ﺘ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ ِ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻣ‬‫ﺯ‬ ‫ﹶ‬‫ﻞ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻗ‬ ‫ﻱ‬ِ‫ﺬ‬‫ﱠ‬
‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ِ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻣ‬
‫ﺰ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻓ‬ ‫ﻊ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻗ‬‫ﻭ‬ ٍ‫ﺙ‬‫ﺪ‬‫ﺣ‬ ‫ﹶﻰ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻋ‬ ‫ﱠ‬
‫ﻝ‬‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﺎ‬‫ﻣ‬
.
The Past Verb-that which indicates upon an event/happening taking place
in the time which is before the time of speaking/conversation.
‫؟‬
‫ﺱ‬‫ﺎ‬
‫ﺒ‬‫ﻋ‬ ‫ﻦ‬‫ﻳ‬‫ﺃ‬
Where is Abbaas?
‫ﺐ‬‫ﻫ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬
ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺪ‬‫ﹸ‬
‫ﳌ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺇﱃ‬
to the head teacher
He went
For every action we have a doer or the one who performs the action. In
Arabic the doer of the action is called ‫ﹸ‬
‫ﻞ‬‫ﻋ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ (al-faa’il).

‫ﻒ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬
‫ﺘ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬
:
The Definition
‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬
‫ﹸ‬
‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻋ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬

‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﻮ‬
‫ﻫ‬

‫ﻪ‬‫ﹸ‬
‫ﻠ‬‫ﻌ‬ِ‫ﻓ‬ 
‫ﻪ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻗ‬ 
‫ﺭ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﹸ‬
‫ﻛ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﺬ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ 
‫ﻉ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﹸ‬
‫ﻓ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬
.
‫ﹸ‬
‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻋ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ (the Doer) is an ism which is 
‫ﻉ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﹸ‬
‫ﻓ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ takes dhammah or
dhammataan on the last letter and mentioned before it is its ‫ﹲ‬
‫ﻞ‬‫ﻌ‬ِ‫ﻓ‬ verb.
‫ﹸ‬
‫ﻞ‬‫ﻌ‬ِ‫ﻔ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬
-
The Verb/Action
‫ﹸ‬
‫ﻞ‬‫ﻌ‬ِ‫ﻔ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬

‫ﺮ‬‫ﻣ‬‫ﺍﻷ‬ ‫ﹸ‬
‫ﻞ‬‫ﻌ‬ِ‫ﻔ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬

‫ﻉ‬ِ‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻀ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﺿ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﹸ‬
‫ﻞ‬‫ﻌ‬ِ‫ﻔ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬
The Past Verb
The Present Verb
The Command Verb
‫ﺐ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻛ‬
-
He Wrote

‫ﺐ‬
‫ﺘ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻜ‬‫ﻳ‬
-
He Writes
‫ﺐ‬
‫ﺘ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻛ‬‫ﹸ‬
‫ﺍ‬
-
(you)Write!
19

‫ﻉ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﹸ‬
‫ﻓ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻣ‬
‫ﺐ‬‫ﻫ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬
ِ‫ﺪ‬ِ‫ﺠ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﹶﻰ‬‫ﻟ‬ِ‫ﺇ‬ 
‫ﺪ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺣ‬
Haamid went to the mosque
‫ﹸ‬
‫ﻞ‬‫ﻌ‬ِ‫ﻓ‬
‫ﹸ‬
‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻋ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬

‫ﺭ‬‫ﻭ‬
‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﻣ‬
ٍ‫ﺽ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻣ‬
You will find that ‫ﹸ‬
‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻋ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ is not always apparent after the verb ‫ﺐ‬‫ﻫ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬. That
is because in the past-tense verbs for the Male Absent if ‫ﹸ‬
‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻋ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ is not
apparent then the 
‫ﺮ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺿ‬ (pronoun) '
‫ﻮ‬
‫ﻫ‬
' (He) will be ‫ﹸ‬
‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻋ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬. And this
dhameer is known as 
‫ﺮ‬ِ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺴ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ 
‫ﺮ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻤ‬
‫ﻀ‬‫ﹶﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ (The Hidden Dhameer), you will not
see it in writing or pronounce it even though it is there.
‫ﻦ‬‫ﻳ‬‫ﺃ‬
‫؟‬
‫ﺪ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﺤ‬
‫ﻣ‬
Where is Muhammad?
‫ﺝ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺧ‬
ِ‫ﺪ‬ِ‫ﺠ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﻦ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬
left from the mosque
He
20
The four signs of an ism
There are 4 signs by which an ism is known, and you will not find these
signs entering upon the verbs or particles/letters, so they are specific to
the nouns. These 4 signs can be used to distinguish between the ٌ
‫ﺀ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﺳ‬‫ﺃ‬
(nouns) and the ‫ﹲ‬
‫ﻝ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻓ‬‫ﺃ‬ (verbs) and 
‫ﻑ‬‫ﻭ‬
‫ﺮ‬
‫ﺣ‬ (particles).
(1) The first sign is that the ism accepts 
‫ﻦ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﻮ‬‫ﻨ‬‫ﺗ‬ (tanween).
(2) The second sign is that ‫ﹾ‬‫ﻝ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ (alif and laam) can enter upon the ism.
(3) The third sign is that 
‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ 
‫ﻑ‬‫ﻭ‬
‫ﺮ‬
‫ﺣ‬ (particles of jarr) can enter upon the
ism.
(4) The fourth sign is that the ism can take 
‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ (kasrah/kasrataan) on the
last letter.

‫ﻦ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﻮ‬‫ﻨ‬‫ﺗ‬
‫ﹾ‬‫ﻝ‬‫ﺍ‬
ِ‫ﺪ‬ِ‫ﺠ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻓ‬ ‫ﱠﻰ‬
‫ﻠ‬‫ﺻ‬ 
‫ﺪ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﺤ‬
‫ﻣ‬
Muhammad prayed in the mosque

‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ 
‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬

‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬
(kasrah)

‫ﺕ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻣ‬‫ﻼ‬‫ﻋ‬
ِ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬
)
٤
(

‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬
-
ِ
-
ٍ 
‫ﻑ‬‫ﻭ‬
‫ﺮ‬
‫ﺣ‬

‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﹾ‬‫ﻝ‬‫ﺍ‬ 
‫ﻦ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﻮ‬‫ﻨ‬‫ﺗ‬
–
ٌ
–
ٍ
-
ً
21
)
٥
(

‫ﺲ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺨ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ 
‫ﺱ‬‫ﺭ‬
‫ﺪ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬
ُ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻓ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺿ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬
:
‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻫ‬
‫ﻰ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﺴ‬
‫ﻳ‬ ‫ﹸ‬
‫ﻝ‬
‫ﻭ‬َ‫ﻷ‬‫ﺍ‬ 
‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ ،
‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ِ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬ ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺪ‬‫ﻘ‬‫ﺗ‬ ‫ﹶﻰ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻋ‬ ِ‫ﻦ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ ‫ﻦ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﺑ‬ ٌ‫ﺔ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﺴ‬ِ‫ﻧ‬

‫ﻑ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻀ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﻰ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﺴ‬
‫ﻳ‬ ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻧ‬‫ﱠﺎ‬
‫ﺜ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ 
‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﻭ‬
ِ‫ﻪ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻟ‬ِ‫ﺇ‬ 
‫ﻑ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻀ‬
‫ﻣ‬
.
‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻓ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺿ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬
ُ (al-idhaafah) is a relationship between two nouns with a hidden
particle of jarr, the first noun is called 
‫ﻑ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻀ‬
‫ﻣ‬ (mudhaaf) and the second
noun is called ِ‫ﻪ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻟ‬ِ‫ﺇ‬ 
‫ﻑ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻀ‬
‫ﻣ‬ (mudhaaf ilaih).
ُ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻓ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺿ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﹶﺍﺍ‬‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬
‫ﻒ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﺗ‬ 
‫ﺪ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻔ‬
‫ﺗ‬
‫ﻀ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬

‫ﻪ‬‫ﺼ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﺼ‬‫ﺨ‬‫ﺗ‬ ‫ﻭ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺃ‬ ِ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺎ‬
.
This Particular idhaafah gives benefit by giving 
‫ﻒ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﺗ‬ (to make definite)
to the mudhaaf or 
‫ﺺ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﺼ‬‫ﺨ‬‫ﺗ‬ (to narrow down/particularise). Meaning, if
the ِ‫ﻪ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻟ‬ِ‫ﺇ‬ 
‫ﻑ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻀ‬
‫ﻣ‬ is ٌ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻓ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﻣ‬ (definite) then the 
‫ﻑ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻀ‬
‫ﻣ‬ will become ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻓ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﻣ‬, if the
ِ‫ﻪ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻟ‬ِ‫ﺇ‬ 
‫ﻑ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻀ‬
‫ﻣ‬ is ‫ﹲ‬
‫ﺓ‬‫ﺮ‬ِ‫ﻜ‬‫ﻧ‬ (indefinite) then the 
‫ﻑ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻀ‬
‫ﻣ‬ will be particularised or not
so general but it will not be ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻓ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﻣ‬ (definite).
‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻓ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺿ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬
ُ

‫ﻑ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻀ‬
‫ﻣ‬
ِِ‫ﻪ‬‫ﺇﻟﻴ‬ 
‫ﻑ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻀ‬
‫ﻣ‬

‫ﺏ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺘ‬ِ‫ﻛ‬
ٍ‫ﺪ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﺤ‬
‫ﻣ‬
22

‫ﻑ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻀ‬
‫ﻣ‬
ِ‫ﻪ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻟ‬ِ‫ﺇ‬ 
‫ﻑ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻀ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﹶﺍ‬‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬
ِ‫ﺱ‬
‫ﺭ‬‫ﺪ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ 
‫ﺏ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺘ‬ِ‫ﻛ‬
This is the teacher’s book
‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻓ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﻣ‬
ٌ
‫ﹲ‬
‫ﺔ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻓ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﻣ‬
The Idhafaah construction has a 
‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ 
‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬ which is omitted/hidden.
This 
‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ 
‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬ gives meaning to the Idhaafah, there are 3 different

‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ 
‫ﻑ‬‫ﻭ‬
‫ﺮ‬
‫ﺣ‬ that an Idhaafah can have, (1) ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻓ‬ (in), ‫ﻦ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬ (from/part of) and

‫ﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﻼ‬ (ِ‫ﻝ‬) (for/belonging to).
At the moment we have only taken one meaning of the Idhaafah the 
‫ﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﻼ‬

‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ 
‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬
)
ِ‫ﻝ‬
( which has the meaning of, for/belonging to/possession.
So when we say ٍ‫ﺪ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﺤ‬
‫ﻣ‬ 
‫ﺏ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺘ‬ِ‫ﻛ‬ it literally means, ‘the book belongs to
Muhammad or Muhammad’s book )
ٍ‫ﺪ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﺤ‬
‫ﻤ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬ 
‫ﺏ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺘ‬ِ‫ﻛ‬
( .

‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬

‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬
)
‫ﺍﻟﻼﻡ‬
(

‫ﺏ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺘ‬ِ‫ﻛ‬
ٍ‫ﺪ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﺤ‬
‫ﻣ‬

‫ﻑ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻀ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬
ِ‫ﻪ‬ِ‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻟ‬ِ‫ﺇ‬ 
‫ﻑ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻀ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬
‫ﺍﺀﺋ‬‫ﺩ‬
‫ﺎ‬‫ﻤ‬

‫ﺭ‬‫ﻭ‬
‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﻣ‬
–
Always
Majroor
‫ﻻ‬
‫ﹸ‬
‫ﻥ‬
‫ﻮ‬‫ﻨ‬
‫ﻳ‬
–
Does not accept tanween
‫ﻻ‬
‫ﹾ‬‫ﻝ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﹸ‬
‫ﻞ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﻘ‬‫ﻳ‬
–
Does not accept alif laam
23
‫ﻙ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻨ‬
‫ﻫ‬
-
)
over there
(
-
ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ 
‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬
ِ‫ﺪ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻌ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ِ‫ﻥ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻜ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬ ِ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺷ‬
‫ﻙ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻨ‬
‫ﻫ‬ is a noun which is used to indicate/point to a place that is distant or
far.
‫ﹲ‬
‫ﻝ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﺜ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬
:
‫ٍ؟‬‫ﺪ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﺤ‬
‫ﻣ‬ 
‫ﺏ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺘ‬ِ‫ﻛ‬ ‫ﻦ‬‫ﻳ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺃ‬
Where is Muhammad’s book?
‫ﻮ‬
‫ﻫ‬
ِ‫ﺐ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻜ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﹶﻰ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻋ‬
‫ﻙ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻨ‬
‫ﻫ‬
over there
It is on the table
‫ﺖ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﺗ‬
-
(under)
ِ‫ﻥ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻜ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ 
‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬
/
ِ‫ﻥ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻜ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ 
‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻇ‬
)

‫ﻩ‬‫ﺪ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﺑ‬ ‫ﺎ‬‫ﻣ‬ 
‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬
‫ﻳ‬
(
ِ‫ﻥ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻜ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ 
‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬ is a noun of place and the ism that follows it is majroor.
ُ‫ﺔ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻘ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬
‫ﺖ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﺗ‬
ِ‫ﺐ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻜ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬
The bag is under the table
The particle ‫ﺎ‬‫ﻳ‬ (O!) is used when we want to call somebody and the
person we are calling is the ism which comes after this particle and it is
known as ‫ﻯ‬‫ﺩ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻨ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ (the one being called). There are 5 types of ‫ﻯ‬‫ﺩ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻨ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬, we
will study 3 for now.

‫ﺱ‬‫ﺎ‬
‫ﺒ‬‫ﻋ‬ ‫ﺎ‬‫ﻳ‬

‫ﺱ‬‫ﺎ‬
‫ﺒ‬‫ﻋ‬
-
‫ﻯ‬‫ﺩ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻨ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺎ‬‫ﻳ‬
-
‫ﺍ‬‫ﺪ‬
‫ﻨ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ 
‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬
ِ‫ﺀ‬
O- Particle of calling
Abbaas- The one being called
24
‫ﻯ‬‫ﺩ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻨ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬
)
١
(

‫ﻢ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬
‫ﺩ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬
:

‫ﺪ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﺤ‬
‫ﻣ‬ ‫ﺎ‬‫ﻳ‬

‫ﺱ‬‫ﺎ‬
‫ﺒ‬‫ﻋ‬،
‫ﺪ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺣ‬،
The first type is when we call
somebody by their name i.e. O Muhammad!, Haamid!, ‘Abbaas!, and so
on.
)
٢
(
‫ﹸ‬
‫ﺓ‬‫ﺩ‬‫ﻮ‬
‫ﺼ‬‫ﻘ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﹸ‬
‫ﺓ‬‫ﺮ‬ِ‫ﻜ‬
‫ﻨ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬
:
‫ﹸ‬
‫ﺫ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺳ‬‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﺎ‬‫ﻳ‬
،‫ﹸ‬
‫ﻞ‬
‫ﺟ‬‫ﺭ‬ ،
The second type is when we
call somebody and we intend a particular or specific person i.e. O
Teacher!, Man!, and so on.
)
٣
(

‫ﻑ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻀ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬
:
‫ﱠ‬
‫ﻠ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ ‫ﺪ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﻋ‬ ‫ﺎ‬‫ﻳ‬
ِ‫ﻪ‬
ٍ‫ﺪ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺧ‬ ‫ﺖ‬‫ﻨ‬ِ‫ﺑ‬،
The third type is when the one
being called is mudhaaf i.e. O ‘Abdallaahi!, O Daughter of Khaalid!,
and so on.
It is important to note that the first and the second types of ‫ﻯ‬‫ﺩ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻨ‬
‫ﻣ‬ end in
one dhamma, not tanween. As for the third type then the Mudhaaf will be

‫ﺏ‬‫ﻮ‬
‫ﺼ‬‫ﻨ‬‫ﻣ‬ (take Fathah on the last letter).
The words 
‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬ and 
‫ﻦ‬‫ﺑ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬ begin with hamzatu l-wasl. When preceded by a
word the kasrah (ِ-) is dropped in pronunciation, i.e.
.ِ‫ﺱ‬
‫ﺭ‬‫ﺪ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ 
‫ﺐ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻃ‬ ٍ‫ﻝ‬‫ِﻼ‬‫ﺑ‬ 
‫ﻦ‬‫ﺑ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﻭ‬ ،‫ﹲ‬
‫ﻝ‬‫ِﻼ‬‫ﺑ‬ ِ‫ﺐ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﺒ‬‫ﱠ‬
‫ﻄ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ 
‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﻭ‬ ، 
‫ﺐ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﺒ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻃ‬ ِ‫ﺱ‬
‫ﺭ‬‫ﺪ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ 
‫ﻦ‬‫ﺑ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬
25
)
٦
(

‫ﺱ‬ِ‫ﺩ‬‫ﺎ‬
‫ﺴ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ 
‫ﺱ‬‫ﺭ‬
‫ﺪ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬
ِ‫ﻩ‬ِ‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬
‫ﹲ‬
‫ﺓ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻜ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬
is an iron
This
‫ﹾ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻫ‬
-
ِ‫ﻪ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﺒ‬‫ﻨ‬
‫ﺘ‬‫ِﻠ‬‫ﻟ‬ 
‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬
Letter to bring to attention or alert

‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬
ِ‫ﻪ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﺒ‬‫ﻨ‬
‫ﺘ‬‫ِﻠ‬‫ﻟ‬ is a letter that is used to alert or to bring to attention the
person who is being addressed and it is mostly connected to ِ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺷ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ ُ
‫ﺀ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﺳ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺃ‬
(nouns of indication).
ِ‫ﻩ‬ِ‫ﺫ‬
ِ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺷ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ 
‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬
Noun of Indication
‫ِﻩ‬‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬is pronounced as ِ‫ﻩ‬ِ‫ﺫ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻫ‬ but it is written without the first alif.
The ِ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺷ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ 
‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬ is used to point or indicate to people, animals, objects
things which can be felt or touched and can also indicate to things that
have meaning such as ‫ﹲ‬
‫ﺓ‬‫ﺪ‬ِ‫ﻋ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻗ‬ ‘principle’ orٌ‫ﺔ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﺼ‬‫ﻧ‬ ‘advice’.
ِ‫ﻩ‬ِ‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬
‫ﺔ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﺼ‬‫ﻧ‬
ٌ
‫ﺔ‬‫ﻌ‬ِ‫ﻓ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻧ‬
ٌ
-
This advice is beneficial.
The table below shows the properties of ِ‫ﻩ‬ِ‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬.
Indicates,points to ‫ﹸ‬
‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺷ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬
‫ﹶﻰ‬‫ﻟ‬ِ‫ﺇ‬
the near

‫ﺐ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻘ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬
the feminine
‫ﹸ‬
‫ﺚ‬
‫ﻧ‬‫ﺆ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬
the singular or (non-intelligent
plurals)

‫ﺩ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﹸ‬
‫ﻔ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬
26
The 
‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬
ِ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺷ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ is ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻓ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﻣ‬
ٌ (definite).
It can be used to indicate or point to those possessing intellect ‫ﹲ‬
‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻗ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻋ‬ or
things that do not possess intellect ٍ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻗ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻋ‬
‫ﺮ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻏ‬.
-Generally words ending in ‫ﺓ‬ (taa marboota) are regarded as feminine so
when we indicate to them we use the 
‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬
ِ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺷ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬
ِ‫ﻩ‬ِ‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬ . However there
are exceptions to this, (refer to lesson 4 under ‘types of femininity’).
‫ﹲ‬
‫ﻝ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﺜ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬
:
‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬
‫ﻴ‬‫ﺳ‬ ِ‫ﻩ‬ِ‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬
‫ﹲ‬
‫ﺓ‬
‫ﺟ‬‫ﺍ‬
‫ﺭ‬‫ﺩ‬ ِ‫ﻩ‬ِ‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬‫ﻭ‬
‫ﺔ‬
ٌ
This is a car and this is a bike.
-Body parts that are in pairs are regarded as feminine.
‫ﹲ‬
‫ﻝ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﺜ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬
:
ِ‫ﻩ‬ِ‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬
‫ﹲ‬
‫ﻥ‬‫ﹸ‬
‫ﺫ‬‫ﺃ‬
ِ‫ﻩ‬ِ‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬‫ﻭ‬

‫ﻦ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﻋ‬
This is
an ear and this is an eye
-Also words which are particular to females are regarded as feminine.
‫ﹲ‬
‫ﻝ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﺜ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬
:
ِ‫ﻩ‬ِ‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬

‫ﺖ‬‫ﺧ‬‫ﺃ‬

‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬
ِ‫ﻩ‬ِ‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬‫ﻭ‬ ِ‫ﺱ‬ِ‫ﺪ‬‫ﻨ‬‫ﻬ‬

‫ﺖ‬‫ﻨ‬ِ‫ﺑ‬
ِ‫ﻡ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻣ‬‫ﺍﻹ‬
This is the engineer’s sister
and this is the imaam’s daughter.
ِ‫ﻝ‬
-

‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ 
‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬
Particle of Jarr (for, belongs to, )
The particle of jarrِ‫ﻝ‬ enters upon an ism and causes it to take 
‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬
(kasrah).
ِ‫ﻟ‬
‫ِ؟‬‫ﻩ‬ِ‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬ ‫ﻦ‬‫ﻤ‬
ِ‫ﻩ‬ِ‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬
ِ‫ﻟ‬
ٍ‫ﺮ‬ِ‫ﺳ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻴ‬
.
Yaasir
to
belongs
This
?
is this
Whose

‫ﺭ‬‫ﻭ‬
‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﻣ‬
27

‫ﺪ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬
ِ‫ﻪ‬‫ﹼ‬
‫ﻠ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬
belongs to Allaah
All Praise
Note that the word 
‫ﻪ‬‫ﹼ‬
‫ﻠ‬‫ﹶﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ becomes ِ‫ﻪ‬‫ﹼ‬
‫ﻠ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬ by just dropping the alif and no laam
will need to be added to the word.
28
)
٧
(

‫ﺪ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬

‫ﻊ‬ِ‫ﺑ‬‫ﺎ‬
‫ﺴ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ 
‫ﺱ‬‫ﺭ‬
‫ﻚ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ‫ﺗ‬
-
ِ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺷ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ 
‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬
Noun of Indication
‫ﻭ‬ ٌ‫ﺔ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﺒ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻃ‬ ِ‫ﻩ‬ِ‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬
‫ﻚ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ‫ﺗ‬
ٌ‫ﺔ‬‫ﺿ‬
‫ﺮ‬‫ﻤ‬
‫ﻣ‬
.
is a nurse
that
This a doctor and
‫ﻚ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ‫ﺗ‬ is a noun of indication it is used to indicate/point to objects or people
that are distant/far and feminine. ‫ﻚ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ‫ﺗ‬can be broken down into three parts:
‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﺗ‬
-
ِ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ِﺷﺎ‬‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ 
‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬
Noun of indication
ِ‫ﻝ‬
–
ِ‫ﺪ‬‫ﻌ‬
‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬ 
‫ﻡ‬‫ﹶﻟﻼ‬‫ﺍ‬
The laam is for the far/distant
‫ﻙ‬
-

‫ﺏ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻄ‬ِ‫ﺧ‬ 
‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬
Particle of address
Some of the grammarians say that the ‘‫ﻙ‬’ particle of address also
indicates upon far/distant and the ‘ِ‫ﻝ‬’ shows upon even more or
increased furtherness/distance.
The letter/particle of address ‘‫ﻙ‬’ is used if the person or object we are
addressing is masculine.
29
The table below shows the properties of ‫ﻚ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ‫ﺗ‬:
Indicates,points to ‫ﹸ‬
‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺷ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬
‫ﹶﻰ‬‫ﻟ‬ِ‫ﺇ‬
The far/distant

‫ﺪ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻌ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬
The feminine
‫ﹸ‬
‫ﺚ‬
‫ﻧ‬‫ﺆ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬
The singular

‫ﺩ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﹸ‬
‫ﻔ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬
All the ِ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺷ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ ُ
‫ﺀ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﺳ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺃ‬ nouns of indication are ٌ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻓ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﻣ‬ definite.
The letter ‫ﻱ‬ in ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﺗ‬ is dropped when joined to the laam and kaaf and the
laam takes a sukoon ‫ﹾﻚ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ‫ﺗ‬.
ُ
‫ﺀ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﺳ‬‫ﺃ‬
ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬
ِ‫ﺐ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻘ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬ ِ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺷ‬
ُ
‫ﺀ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﺳ‬‫ﺃ‬
ِ‫ﺪ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻌ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬ ِ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺷ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬
‫ﹶﺍ‬‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬

‫ﺪ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﺤ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﻚ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬

‫ﺪ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬‫ﺣﺎ‬
ِ‫ﻩ‬ِ‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬
ُ‫ﺔ‬‫ﻨ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬‫ﺁ‬
‫ﻚ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ‫ﺗ‬

‫ﺐ‬‫ﻨ‬‫ﻳ‬‫ﺯ‬
30
Al-I’raab-
‫ﺏ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻋ‬‫ﹶﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬

‫ﻒ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬
‫ﺘ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬
:

‫ﺏ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻋ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬
‫ﻮ‬
‫ﻫ‬
:
‫ﺗ‬
ِ‫ﻴ‬‫ﻐ‬
ِ‫ﻑ‬‫ِﻼ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺧ‬ِ‫ﻻ‬ ِ‫ﻢ‬ِ‫ﻠ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻜ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ِ‫ﺮ‬ِ‫ﺧ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﻭ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺃ‬ 
‫ﺮ‬‫ﻴ‬
ِ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬
ِ‫ﺔ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ‫ﺧ‬‫ﺍ‬
‫ﺪ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬
‫ﺎ‬‫ﻬ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻋ‬
‫ﹰ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﹾﻈ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻟ‬
‫ﻭ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺃ‬
‫ﹰ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺪ‬‫ﻘ‬‫ﺗ‬
.
The Definition:
The I’raab is: Changing of the endings of the words because of the
changing of the active elements entering upon them (the change is)
apparent or not-apparent.

‫ﺕ‬‫ﺎﻻ‬‫ﺣ‬
ِ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬
The cases of the ism

‫ﺕ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻣ‬‫ﻼ‬‫ﻋ‬
ِ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻋ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬
‫ﺔ‬
‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻠ‬‫ﺻ‬‫ﺍﻷ‬
ُ
The origin signs of ‘Iraab

‫ﻉ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﻧ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺃ‬
ِ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻋ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬
Types of ‘Iraab

‫ﻉ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﹸ‬
‫ﻓ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻣ‬ ٌ
- /-ُ 
‫ﻊ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻓ‬
‫ﺮ‬‫ﹶﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬

‫ﺏ‬‫ﻮ‬
‫ﺼ‬‫ﻨ‬‫ﻣ‬ -
ً / َ- 
‫ﺐ‬‫ﺼ‬
‫ﻨ‬‫ﹶﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬

‫ﺭ‬‫ﻭ‬
‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﻣ‬ ٍ- / ِ- 
‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬
The above definition for I’raab mentions the ending of words changing
what is meant by this is the changing of vowel markings that are on the
end or last letter of a word. It also mentions that it is the active elements
that enter upon a word that cause the change at the ending of a word, an
example of active elements are the 
‫ﻑ‬‫ﻭ‬
‫ﺮ‬
‫ﺣ‬ (letters/particles). The active
element is called ‫ﹸ‬
‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ (al-‘aamil) in Arabic and the plural is ‫ﹸ‬
‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬.
The definition also mentions that the change of a word can be apparent or
not apparent. What is meant by ‫ﹶ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﹾﻈ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻟ‬ apparent change is when the vowel
markings at the end of a word can be pronounced and when the vowel
31
markings at the end of a word cannot be pronounced then the change
is‫ﺍ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺪ‬‫ﻘ‬‫ﺗ‬ not apparent. This part will be explained in more depth later.
The table above illustrates types of I’raab and its origin signs.

‫ﻊ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻓ‬
‫ﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ (ar-raf’u) is when the end or last letter of a word takes a dhammah or
dhammataan 
‫ﺖ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ / 
‫ﺖ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﺑ‬

‫ﺐ‬‫ﺼ‬
‫ﻨ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ (an-nasbu) is when the end or last letter of a word takes a fatha or
fathataan ‫ﺖ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ / ‫ﹰ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﺑ‬

‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ (al-jarru) is when the end or last letter of a word takes a khasrah or
khasrataan ِ‫ﺖ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ / ٍ‫ﺖ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﺑ‬
Also when an ism is in the state of 
‫ﻊ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻓ‬
‫ﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ (ar-raf’u) it is called 
‫ﻉ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﹸ‬
‫ﻓ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻣ‬
(marfoo’).
When an ism is in the state of 
‫ﺐ‬‫ﺼ‬
‫ﻨ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ (an-nasbu) it is called 
‫ﺏ‬‫ﻮ‬
‫ﺼ‬‫ﻨ‬‫ﻣ‬
mansoob).
When an ism is in the state of 
‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ (al-jarru) it is called 
‫ﺭ‬‫ﻭ‬
‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﻣ‬ (majroor).
)
‫ﹸ‬
‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬
(
‫ﹲ‬
‫ﻝ‬‫ﻮ‬
‫ﻌ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﻣ‬
ِ‫ﻪ‬ِ‫ﺑ‬
‫ﹸ‬
‫ﻞ‬‫ﻌ‬ِ‫ﻓ‬
ٍ‫ﺽ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻣ‬

‫ﺏ‬‫ﻮ‬
‫ﺼ‬‫ﻨ‬‫ﻣ‬

‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬

‫ﺭ‬‫ﻭ‬
‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﻣ‬
‫ﹲ‬
‫ﻝ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﺜ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬
:
‫ﻳ‬‫ﺯ‬ ‫ﺢ‬‫ﺑ‬َ‫ﺫ‬

‫ﺪ‬
‫ﺟ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺟ‬
‫ﺪ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬
َ‫ﺔ‬

‫ﺴ‬‫ِﺎﻟ‬‫ﺑ‬
‫ﻴ‬‫ﱢ‬
‫ﻜ‬
‫ﻦ‬
ِ
Zayd slaughtered the chicken
with the knife.

‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬

‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬
)
‫ﹸ‬
‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬
(
‫ﹸ‬
‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻋ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬
‫ﻣ‬

‫ﻉ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﹸ‬
‫ﻓ‬‫ﺮ‬
32
The example above shows the three types of I’raab , 
‫ﺪ‬‫ﻳ‬‫ﺯ‬ is 
‫ﻉ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﹸ‬
‫ﻓ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻣ‬ the
‫ﹲ‬
‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻋ‬ (active element) which is causing it to be 
‫ﻉ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﹸ‬
‫ﻓ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻣ‬ is the ٍ‫ﺽ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻣ‬ ‫ﹸ‬
‫ﻞ‬‫ﻌ‬ِ‫ﻓ‬
(past tense verb) ‫ﺢ‬‫ﺑ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬ , َ ‫ﺔ‬‫ﺟ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺟ‬
‫ﺪ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ is 
‫ﺏ‬‫ﻮ‬
‫ﺼ‬‫ﻨ‬‫ﻣ‬ the ‫ﹲ‬
‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻋ‬ (active element)
which is causing it to be 
‫ﺏ‬‫ﻮ‬
‫ﺼ‬‫ﻨ‬‫ﻣ‬ is the ٍ‫ﺽ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻣ‬ ‫ﹸ‬
‫ﻞ‬‫ﻌ‬ِ‫ﻓ‬ (past tense verb) ‫ﺢ‬‫ﺑ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬,
ِ‫ﻦ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﱢ‬
‫ﻜ‬
‫ﺴ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ (knife) is 
‫ﺭ‬‫ﻭ‬
‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﻣ‬ the ‫ﹲ‬
‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻋ‬ (active element) which is causing it to
be 
‫ﺭ‬‫ﻭ‬
‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﻣ‬ is the 
‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ 
‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬
)
ِ‫ﺏ‬
( .
The words which fall into the definition of I’raab as mentioned above are
known in Arabic as 
‫ﺏ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬
‫ﻣ‬ (mu’rab).
ُ
‫ﺀ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻨ‬ِ‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ (al-binaa)
ُ
‫ﺀ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻨ‬ِ‫ﺒ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ (al-binaa) are words which do not show change in their endings and
they are considered by the grammarians to be the opposite of words
which take 
‫ﺏ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻋ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ (al-I’raab), as mentioned above. The words which
fall into this category are called 
ِ
َْ
$ (mabni).

‫ﻒ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﺗ‬

‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬
:
‫ﺎ‬‫ﻣ‬
‫ﻻ‬

‫ﺮ‬
‫ﻴ‬‫ﻐ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﻳ‬

‫ﻩ‬
‫ﺮ‬ِ‫ﺧ‬‫ﺁ‬
ِ‫ﺐ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﺴ‬ِ‫ﺑ‬
ِ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬
ِ‫ﺔ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ‫ﺧ‬‫ﺍ‬
‫ﺪ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬
‫ﺎ‬‫ﻬ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻋ‬
.
Definition of 
‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﻣ‬ (mabniyy): That which it’s ending doesn’t change
because of the active elements entering upon it.
The definition explains that words which are 
‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﻣ‬ their endings do not
change because of the ‫ﹲ‬
‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﻋ‬ (active elements) entering upon them, but
rather they are built upon one ending which doesn’t change at all.
However, these words can grammatically have a place in I’raab but they
33
will be in the position or state of 
‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬،
‫ﺐ‬‫ﺼ‬
‫ﻨ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬،
‫ﻊ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻓ‬
‫ﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ due to their place in
the sentence. This point will be elaborated upon later.

‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﻣ‬
‫ﹶﻰ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻋ‬
.....
Built upon……
ٌ‫ِﻠﺔ‬‫ﺜ‬‫ﻣ‬‫ﺃ‬
Examples

‫ﻉ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﻧ‬‫ﺃ‬
ِ‫ﺀ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻨ‬ِ‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬
Types of Al-binaa

‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﻣ‬
ٍ‫ﻥ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﹸ‬
‫ﻜ‬
‫ﺳ‬ ‫ﹶﻰ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻋ‬ ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻓ‬ ،‫ﻢ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﻧ‬ ،‫ﹾ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﻫﺬ‬ ،‫ﻦ‬‫ﻣ‬ ‫ﹲ‬
‫ﻥ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﹸ‬
‫ﻜ‬
‫ﺳ‬
-
-
ْ
ٍ‫ﺔ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﺿ‬ ‫ﹶﻰ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻋ‬ 
‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﻣ‬ ‫ﹸ‬
‫ﺚ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﺣ‬ ،
‫ﻦ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﻧ‬ 
‫ﻤ‬‫ﺿ‬
ٌ‫ﺔ‬
-
-
ُ

‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﻣ‬
ٍ‫ﺔ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻓ‬ ‫ﹶﻰ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻋ‬ ‫ﺖ‬‫ﻧ‬‫ﺃ‬ ،‫ﺐ‬‫ﻫ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬ ،‫ﻦ‬‫ﻳ‬‫ﺃ‬ ٌ‫ﺔ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻓ‬
-
-
َ

‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﻣ‬
ٍ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻛ‬ ‫ﹶﻰ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻋ‬ ِ‫ﺀ‬‫ﻻ‬
‫ﺆ‬‫ﻫ‬ ،ِ‫ﻝ‬ ،ِ‫ﺖ‬‫ﻧ‬‫ﺃ‬ ،ِ‫ﻩ‬ِ‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬ ٌ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻛ‬
-
-
ِ
The table above shows that words which are 
‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﻣ‬ can fall into four types
of endings which do not change due to the ‫ﹲ‬
‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﻋ‬ entering upon them,
rather they are fixed or built upon that particular ending. There are four
possible endings, ‫َة‬
*ْ+َ
‫آ‬ ،.َ
/َْ
0 ،.
1َ
2 ،ٌ
‫ن‬ْ!ُ
4ُ
5 .

‫ﻑ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻀ‬
‫ﻣ‬
ِ‫ﻪ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻟ‬ِ‫ﺇ‬ 
‫ﻑ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻀ‬
‫ﻣ‬
‫ﹲ‬
‫ﻝ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﺜ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬
:
‫ﻣ‬ 
‫ﺏ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺘ‬ِ‫ﻛ‬
‫ﻦ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ؟‬
Whose book is this?

‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﻣ‬
ٍ‫ﻥ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﹸ‬
‫ﻜ‬
‫ﺳ‬ ‫ﹶﻰ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻋ‬
The above example shows that the word ‫ﻦ‬‫ﻣ‬ is ِ‫ﻪ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺇ‬ 
‫ﻑ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻀ‬
‫ﻣ‬ and we know
that the mudhaaf ilaih is always majroor (takes kasrah), however the word
34
‫ﻦ‬‫ﻣ‬ (who) is 
‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﻣ‬
ٍ‫ﻥ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﹸ‬
‫ﻜ‬
‫ﺳ‬ ‫ﹶﻰ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻋ‬ (built upon a sukoon) so the ending will
always show a sukoon even though it is in the position or state of 
‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ (al-
jarr) due to its place in the sentence. So the ‫ﹲ‬
‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻋ‬ (active element) does
not affect the ending of a word that is 
‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﻣ‬ (mabni).
35
)
٨
(

‫ﻦ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎ‬ 
‫ﺱ‬‫ﺭ‬
‫ﺪ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬
(al-Badal)-‫ﹸ‬
‫ﻝ‬‫ﺪ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬
‫ﺃ‬‫ﺪ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺒ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬
‫ﺨ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬

‫ﺮ‬‫ﺒ‬
‫ﹶﺍ‬‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬
‫ﹸ‬
‫ﻞ‬
‫ﺟ‬
‫ﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬

‫ﺮ‬ِ‫ﺟ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺗ‬
.
This man is a trader.
‫ﹸ‬
‫ﻝ‬‫ﺪ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬
(al-badal)
In the above example the ism ‫ﹸ‬
‫ﻞ‬
‫ﺟ‬
‫ﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ is grammatically known as ‫ﹸ‬
‫ﻝ‬‫ﺪ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ (al-
badal), it used in a sentence in order to give 
‫ﺪ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻛ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﺗ‬ (emphasis) and ‫ﹲ‬
‫ﻥ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﺑ‬
(clarity or explanation) to the word that precedes it. So in the above
example the ism ‫ﹸ‬
‫ﻞ‬
‫ﺟ‬
‫ﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ is giving emphasis and clarity to the word ‫ﹶﺍ‬‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬, it
is telling us that the one being indicated to is ‘the man’.It can also be
understood that the badal is the same the thing as the word which
precedes it, i.e. the man is the one being indicated to and the one being
indicated to is the man.
Another example can be used to explain this, if I had a book in my hand
which I was indicating to and I said to my teacher, ‘this is new’ '
‫ﹶﺍ‬‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬

‫ﺪ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺪ‬‫ﺟ‬
' . It would be understood that the book is new and if I was to
mention the book in my sentence I would say in Arabic, ‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﹶﺍ‬‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬

‫ﺪ‬ِ‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺪ‬‫ﺟ‬ 
‫ﺏ‬‫ِﺘﺎ‬‫ﻜ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬ .
By mentioning '

‫ﺏ‬‫ِﺘﺎ‬‫ﻜ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬
' , I have put a ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺩ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺯ‬
ٌ (extra or additional word in
the sentence which is known as ‫ﹸ‬
‫ﻝ‬‫ﺪ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ (al-badal). It is important to note
36
here that if I were to say in Arabic, ‘
‫ﺏ‬‫ِﺘﺎ‬‫ﻜ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﹶﺍ‬‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬’ this would not be
considered to be a complete or beneficial sentence. To make it a
beneficial sentence we must add a 
‫ﺮ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﺧ‬ (khabar), as shown in the example
above. The subject of ‫ﹸ‬
‫ﻝ‬‫ﺪ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ and the types of al-badal will be covered later
on inshaallaah.
‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬

‫ﻢ‬

‫ﺭ‬‫ﻮ‬
‫ﺼ‬‫ﻘ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬

‫ﺭ‬‫ﻮ‬
‫ﺼ‬‫ﻘ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ 
‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬

‫ﺱ‬
‫ﺭ‬‫ﺪ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬
‫ﻦ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬
‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻜ‬‫ﻳ‬ِِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻣ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺃ‬
‫ﻦ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬ 
‫ﺐ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﱠﺎ‬
‫ﻄ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ ‫ﻭ‬

‫ﺮ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻜ‬‫ﻧ‬ِ‫ﺇ‬
‫ﺍ‬
.
The teacher is from America
and the student is from England.

‫ﺪ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺣ‬
‫ﹶﻰ‬‫ﻟ‬ِ‫ﺇ‬ ‫ﺐ‬‫ﻫ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬
‫ﹶﻰ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﺸ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺴ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬
.
Hamid went to the hospital.

‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬

‫ﺭ‬‫ﻮ‬
‫ﺼ‬‫ﻘ‬

‫ﻒ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬
‫ﺘ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬
:
ٌ‫ﺔ‬‫ﻣ‬ِ‫ﺯ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻻ‬ 
‫ﻒ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺃ‬ 
‫ﻩ‬
‫ﺮ‬ِ‫ﺧ‬‫ﺁ‬ 
‫ﺏ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬
‫ﻣ‬ 
‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﻮ‬
‫ﻫ‬ 
‫ﺭ‬‫ﻮ‬
‫ﺼ‬‫ﻘ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ 
‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬
ٌ‫ﺔ‬‫ﺣ‬‫ﻮ‬
‫ﺘ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﻣ‬
‫ﺎ‬‫ﻬ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻗ‬ ‫ﺎ‬‫ﻣ‬
‫ﻭ‬
‫ﹶ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻋ‬ 
‫ﺭ‬
‫ﺪ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻘ‬
‫ﺗ‬
ِ‫ﺕ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻛ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ 
‫ﻊ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺟ‬ ِ‫ﻪ‬‫ﻴ‬
.
Definition: al-ismul-maqsoor, it is an ism mu’rab which has an
inseparable or binding alif on its end and the letter before it takes a fatha
and all the vowel markings on it are not apparent.
The words ِ‫ﺇ‬،‫ﻰ‬‫ﺳ‬‫ﻮ‬
‫ﻣ‬،‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻜ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻣ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺃ‬
‫ﹶﻰ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﺸ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺴ‬
‫ﻣ‬،‫ﺍ‬
‫ﺮ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻜ‬‫ﻧ‬ all end with an binding alif or the
letter ‫ﻯ‬ which looks like the letter ‫ﻱ‬ (ya) except that it doesn’t have the
two dots but it is pronounced as an alif. Also the ismul-maqsoor is 
‫ﺏ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬
‫ﻣ‬
(mu’rab) it takes 
‫ﺏ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻋ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ (al-I’raab) but the I’raab is 
‫ﺮ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺪ‬‫ﻘ‬‫ﺗ‬ (taqdeer) not
apparent. The examples above illustrate this, the ismul-maqsoor (nouns
37
ending with the binding alif at the end) are preceded by 
‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ 
‫ﻑ‬‫ﻭ‬
‫ﺮ‬
‫ﺣ‬ but
the change caused by the 
‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ 
‫ﻑ‬‫ﻭ‬
‫ﺮ‬
‫ﺣ‬ is not apparent, the case of 
‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ (al-
jarr) cannot be seen. The Ismul-maqsoor falls into one of the categories
or types of words where the I’raab is ‫ﺍ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺪ‬‫ﻘ‬‫ﺗ‬ (please refer back to the
definition of I’raab).
‫ا‬ ‫ن‬ ‫ا‬ ‫ا‬ 
~~
‫ﹸﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺘ‬‫ﹶﻭﺍ‬‫ﺨ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ 
‫ﻭ‬ 
‫ﻥ‬‫ﺇ‬
~~
‘Inna and its likes
‫ﹸﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺘ‬‫ﹶﻭﺍ‬‫ﺨ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ 
‫ﻭ‬ 
‫ﻥ‬‫ﺇ‬
:

‫ﻥ‬ِ
‫ﺇ‬

‫ﻥ‬‫ﺃ‬:
:

‫ﻥ‬ِ
‫ﻜ‬‫ﻝ‬

‫ﻥ‬‫ﺃ‬

‫ﻥ‬ِ
‫ﻜ‬‫ﻝ‬ 
‫ﻥ‬ِ
‫ﺇ‬
‫ﱠ‬
‫ل‬
‫ﻌ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬ ‫ﹶ‬‫ﺕ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬ 
‫ﻥ‬َ‫ﺄ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻜ‬

‫ﺭ‬‫ﹶﺒ‬‫ﺨ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ 
‫ﻊ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬ 
‫ﻭ‬ 
‫ﻡ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ﺍﻹ‬ 
‫ﺏ‬ِ
‫ﺼ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻨ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﻫﻲ‬
.
They make the ism (noun) mansoob (accusative) take a fatha, and
make the khabar marfoo’ (nominative take a damma).
Indeed/verily
Indeed/verily
But
:

‫ﻥ‬َ‫ﺄ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻜ‬
:
‫ﹶ‬‫ﺕ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬
:
‫ﱠ‬
‫ل‬
‫ﻌ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬


‫ﻥ‬‫ﺇ‬
‫ِﻴﺩ‬
‫ﻜ‬‫ﻭ‬‫ﱠ‬
‫ﺘ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ 
‫ﺩ‬‫ِﻴ‬
‫ﻔ‬‫ﹸ‬
‫ﺘ‬
.


‫ﻥ‬‫ﺃ‬
‫ﹰ‬
‫ﺎ‬‫ﺃﻴﻀ‬ 
‫ﺩ‬‫ِﻴ‬
‫ﻜ‬‫ﱠﻭ‬
‫ﺘ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ 
‫ﺩ‬‫ِﻴ‬
‫ﻔ‬‫ﹸ‬
‫ﺘ‬
.
‫ﹸ‬
‫ﺕ‬‫ﻤ‬ِ
‫ﻠ‬
‫ﻋ‬

‫ﻥ‬َ‫ﺃ‬
‫ِﺩ‬
‫ﻝ‬‫ﺨﺎ‬
‫ﹰ‬
‫ﺍ‬
‫ﻴ‬ِ
‫ﺭ‬
‫ﻤ‬

‫ﺽ‬
.
‘Inna brings about
emphasis
Anna brings about emphasis also

‫ﻭ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬
:

‫ﻥ‬‫ﺇ‬
َ‫ﷲ‬‫ﺍ‬
‫ﹸﻭ‬
‫ﻔ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻏ‬

‫ﺭ‬
.
َ‫ل‬‫ﻗﺎ‬ 
‫ﺩ‬‫ﻌ‬
‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ِ
‫ﺔ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻤ‬
‫ﺠ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ِ
‫ل‬
‫ﻭ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ ‫ِﻲ‬
‫ﻓ‬ ‫ِﻲ‬
‫ﺘ‬‫ﹶﺄ‬‫ﺘ‬ 
‫ﻥ‬‫ﺇ‬
.

‫ﺩ‬‫ﻌ‬
‫ﺒ‬ 
‫ﻥ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ ‫ِﻲ‬
‫ﺘ‬‫ﹶﺄ‬‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﻭ‬
‫ﹾﺭﻯ‬‫ﺨ‬ُ
‫ﻷ‬‫ﺍ‬ ِ
‫ل‬‫ﹾﻌﺎ‬‫ﻓ‬ّ
‫ﻷ‬‫ﺍ‬
.

‫ﻥ‬‫ﺇ‬ comes at the beginning of a sentence and after qaala and

‫ﻥ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ comes after the other verbs.
Verily Allah is oft-forgiving
I knew that verily Khaalid is ill.
Would that…. (Used for seeking something impossible
or in which there is difficulty)
It is as if …… (for similitude or speculation)
I hope…(Used for hope or regret)

‫ﻭ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬
:

‫ﻥ‬ِ
‫ﺇ‬
‫ﻲ‬
‫ﺒ‬
‫ﺭ‬ َ‫ﷲ‬‫ﺍ‬
.
‫ﻲ‬
‫ﻤ‬ُ
‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﹾ‬‫ﺕ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬‫ﻗﺎ‬
‫ﱠ‬
‫ﻨ‬‫ﺇ‬

‫ﺩ‬ِ
‫ﻬ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺠ‬
‫ﻤ‬ 
‫ﻙ‬
.
‫ﹸ‬
‫ﺕ‬‫ﻌ‬ِ
‫ﻤ‬
‫ﺴ‬

‫ﻥ‬َ‫ﺃ‬

‫ﻡ‬‫ﻭ‬
‫ﻴ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ 
‫ﺀ‬‫ﺠﺎ‬ ‫ﻤﺎ‬ 
‫ﺱ‬
‫ﺭ‬
‫ﺩ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬
.


‫ﻥ‬ِ
‫ﻜ‬‫ﻝ‬

‫ﻙ‬‫ﺭﺍ‬‫ﺩ‬ِ
‫ﺘ‬‫ﺴ‬ِ
‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ 
‫ﺩ‬‫ِﻴ‬
‫ﻔ‬‫ﹸ‬
‫ﺘ‬
.

‫ﻭ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬
:

‫ﺩ‬ِ
‫ﻬ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺠ‬
‫ﻤ‬ 
‫ﺩ‬
‫ﻤ‬
‫ﺤ‬
‫ﻤ‬

‫ﻥ‬ِ
‫ﻜ‬‫ﻝ‬
‫ﹰ‬
‫ﺍ‬‫ِﺩ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﺤﺎ‬
‫ﻼ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻜ‬

‫ﻥ‬
.
Verily Allah is my lord.
My mother said verily you are
a hard worker.
I heard that verily the teacher did
not come today.
laakina brings about
istidraak….
Muhammad is a hard worker but
Haamid is lazy.
١
٢

‫ﱠ‬
‫ل‬
‫ﻌ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬
‫ﻲ‬
‫ﺠ‬
‫ﺭ‬‫ﱡ‬
‫ﺘ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ 
‫ﺩ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ
‫ﻔ‬‫ﹸ‬
‫ﺘ‬
‫ﻨﺎﻫﺎ‬‫ﻌ‬
‫ﻤ‬ 
‫ﻭ‬
)
‫ﻭ‬
‫ﺠ‬‫ﺭ‬َ‫ﺃ‬
(


‫ﻥ‬َ‫ﺄ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻜ‬
ِ
‫ﻥ‬‫ﹶﻴﺎ‬‫ﻨ‬‫ﻌ‬
‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﹶﻬﺎ‬‫ﻝ‬
.
Conveys speculation Conveys similitude
La’alla conveys hope, and
its meaning is I hope.
Ka’anna has two meanings

‫ﻥ‬‫ﱠ‬
‫ﻅ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ 
‫ﺩ‬‫ِﻴ‬
‫ﻔ‬‫ﹸ‬
‫ﺘ‬ 
‫ﺩ‬‫ِﻴ‬
‫ﻔ‬‫ﹸ‬
‫ﺘ‬

‫ﻪ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ
‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﺸ‬‫ﱠ‬
‫ﺘ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬

‫ﻭ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬
:

‫ﻥ‬َ‫ﺄ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻜ‬
ِ
‫ﺠ‬‫ﺴ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬

‫ﺩ‬

‫ﺴ‬
‫ﺭ‬‫ﺩ‬
‫ﻤ‬
‫ﹲ‬
‫ﺔ‬
.
It is as if the masjid is a
school.

‫ﻭ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬
:

‫ﻙ‬‫ﱠ‬
‫ﻨ‬َ‫ﺄ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻜ‬
ِ
‫ﻥ‬‫ﺍﻝﻴﺎﺒﺎ‬ 
‫ﻥ‬ِ
‫ﻤ‬
.
It is as if you are from Japan.
I hope that the teacher is in his
room.

‫ﻭ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬
:
‫ﱠ‬
‫ل‬
‫ﻌ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬

‫ﺭ‬
‫ﺩ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬

‫ﺱ‬
ِ
‫ﻪ‬ِ
‫ﺘ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﹸ‬
‫ﻏ‬ ‫ِﻲ‬
‫ﻓ‬
.
‫ﹶ‬‫ﺕ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬
‫ل‬‫ﻴ‬ِ
‫ﺤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺴ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ 
‫ﺏ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻁ‬ 
‫ﻭ‬
‫ﻫ‬ 
‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﱢﻲ‬
‫ﻨ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﱠ‬
‫ﺘ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ 
‫ﺩ‬‫ِﻴ‬
‫ﻔ‬‫ﹸ‬
‫ﺘ‬
.

‫ﺭ‬‫ﺴ‬
‫ﻋ‬ ِ
‫ﻪ‬‫ِﻴ‬
‫ﻓ‬ ‫ﻤﺎ‬ 
‫ﻭ‬
.

‫ﻭ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬
:
- seeking of the impossible)
ِْ
َ
ْ ُ ‫ا‬ ُ
َ
َ

(
‫ﹶ‬‫ﺕ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬
‫ﱠﺒﺎ‬
‫ﺸ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬

‫ﺏ‬

‫ﺩ‬‫ﻭ‬
‫ﻌ‬
‫ﻴ‬
.

‫ﻭ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬
:
- that in which there is difficulty)
ٌ
ْ ُ
 ِ
ِ
 
(
‫ﹶ‬‫ﺕ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬
‫ﹰ‬
‫ﺎ‬‫ﻬ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬
‫ﺠ‬ 
‫ﻥ‬‫ﻭ‬
‫ﻴ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ
‫ﻤ‬ ‫ِﻲ‬
‫ﻝ‬
.
Would that I have a million pounds!
Layta brings about hope, and it
is seeking the impossible and
that in which there is difficulty.
Would that youth would return!
~~
‫ﹸﻭ‬
‫ﺫ‬
~~
‫ﹸﻭ‬
‫ﺫ‬
.
‫ﻨﺎﻫﺎ‬‫ﻌ‬
‫ﻤ‬
)

‫ﺏ‬ِ
‫ﺤ‬‫ﺼﺎ‬
(
ِ
‫ﻪ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ
‫ﻠ‬
‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﱢﻱ‬
‫ﺫ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ 
‫ﻡ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ﺍﻻ‬ 
‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﹲ‬
‫ﻑ‬‫ﻀﺎ‬
‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﹰ‬
‫ﺎ‬‫ِﻤ‬
‫ﺌ‬‫ﺍ‬
‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﹸﻭ‬
‫ﺫ‬ 
‫ﻭ‬

‫ﺭ‬‫ﻭ‬
‫ﺭ‬‫ﺠ‬
‫ﻤ‬
ِ
‫ﺔ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻓ‬‫ﺎ‬
‫ﻀ‬ِ
‫ﻹ‬‫ِﺎ‬
‫ﺒ‬
.

‫ﻭ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬
:
‫ﺘﻌﺎﻝﻰ‬ ‫ﻗﺎل‬
:
}

‫ﻥ‬‫ﺇ‬
‫ﹸ‬
‫ﻕ‬‫ﺍ‬
‫ﺯ‬
‫ﺭ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ 
‫ﻭ‬
‫ﻫ‬ َ‫ﷲ‬‫ﺍ‬
‫ﹸﻭ‬
‫ﺫ‬

‫ﻭ‬‫ﹸ‬
‫ﻘ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬
ِ
‫ﺓ‬
‫ﻴ‬ِ
‫ﺘ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬

‫ﻥ‬
{
The different forms
‫ﹸﻭ‬
‫ﺫ‬
‫ﻭ‬
‫ﻭ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬
‫ﹸ‬
‫ﺕ‬‫ﺫﺍ‬
‫ﹸ‬
‫ﺕ‬‫ﹶﻭﺍ‬‫ﺫ‬
Dhu: its meaning is possessor/owner, and it is always mudaaf
(possessed) and the noun which is next to it is genitive (majroor), by
construction.
Allah the most high says (translated meaning):
‘Verily Allah he is the sustainer, the possessor of
might and power’
For feminine
plural

‫ﻊ‬‫ﻤ‬
‫ﺠ‬ ِ
‫ﺙ‬‫ﱠ‬
‫ﻨ‬َ‫ﺅ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ِﻠ‬
‫ﻝ‬
For feminine
singular
‫ﺩ‬
‫ﺭ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬
‫ﻤ‬ ِ
‫ﺙ‬‫ﱠ‬
‫ﻨ‬َ‫ﺅ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ِﻠ‬
‫ﻝ‬
For masculine
plural
‫ﻊ‬‫ﻤ‬
‫ﺠ‬ ‫ﱠﺭ‬
‫ﻜ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ِﻠ‬
‫ﻝ‬
For masculine
singular
‫ﺩ‬
‫ﺭ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬
‫ﻤ‬ ِ
‫ﺭ‬‫ﱠ‬
‫ﻜ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ِﻠ‬
‫ﻝ‬

‫ﺏ‬ِ
‫ﻝ‬‫ﱠﺎ‬
‫ﻁ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻫﺫﺍ‬
‫ﹸﻭ‬
‫ﺫ‬
‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ
‫ﻋ‬
ٍ
‫ﻡ‬

‫ﺏ‬‫ﱡﻼ‬
‫ﻁ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ِ
‫ﺀ‬‫ُﻻ‬
‫ﺅ‬‫ﻫ‬
‫ﻭ‬
‫ﻭ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬
‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ
‫ﻋ‬
ٍ
‫ﻡ‬
‫ﹸ‬
‫ﺔ‬
‫ﺒ‬ِ
‫ﻝ‬‫ﱠﺎ‬
‫ﻁ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ِ
‫ﻩ‬ِ
‫ﺫ‬‫ﻫ‬
‫ﹸ‬
‫ﺕ‬‫ﺫﺍ‬
‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ
‫ﻋ‬
ٍ
‫ﻡ‬
‫ﹸ‬
‫ﺕ‬‫ِﺒﺎ‬
‫ﻝ‬‫ﱠﺎ‬
‫ﻁ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ِ
‫ﺀ‬‫ُﻻ‬
‫ﺅ‬‫ﻫ‬
‫ﹸ‬
‫ﺕ‬‫ﹶﻭﺍ‬‫ﺫ‬
‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ
‫ﻋ‬
ٍ
‫ﻡ‬
These students
(female pl.)
possesses knowledge
This student
(female sig.)
Posseses knowledge
These students
(male pl.) posses
knowledge
This student
(male sig.) posses
knowledge
~~
‫ﻡ‬َ‫ﺃ‬

‫ﻭ‬
‫َﻭ‬‫ﺃ‬
~~
)
‫ﻡ‬َ‫ﺃ‬
(
ِ
‫ﻡ‬‫ﹾﻬﺎ‬‫ﻔ‬ِ
‫ﺘ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ِﻺ‬
‫ﻝ‬
.

‫ﻭ‬
)
‫َﻭ‬‫ﺃ‬
(
ِ
‫ﻡ‬‫ﹾﻬﺎ‬‫ﻔ‬ِ
‫ﺘ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ﺍﻹ‬ ِ
‫ﺭ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻐ‬ِ
‫ﻝ‬
.

‫ﻭ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬
:
َ‫ﺃ‬ ِ
‫ﺩ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻨ‬ِ
‫ﻬ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ 
‫ﻥ‬ِ
‫ﻤ‬ َ‫ﺃ‬
‫ﹶ‬‫ﺕ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻨ‬
‫ﻡ‬َ‫ﺃ‬
‫؟‬
‫ﻥ‬‫ﺘﺎ‬‫ﺴ‬ِ
‫ﻜ‬‫ﺒﺎ‬ ‫ﻥ‬ِ
‫ﻤ‬

‫ﻭ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬
:
‫ﹶﺍ‬‫ﺫ‬
‫ﻫ‬ ‫ﹾ‬‫ﺫ‬‫ﹸ‬
‫ﺨ‬
‫َﻭ‬‫ﺃ‬

‫ﻙ‬ِ
‫ﻝ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬
`Am is used for questioning
(sentence)
Are you from India or Pakistan?
And ‘Aw is used for non-questioning.
(sentence)
Take this or that.
‫ﹲ‬
‫ﺔ‬َ‫ﺌ‬‫ﻤﺎ‬

‫ﻭ‬
‫ﹲ‬
‫ﻑ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻝ‬َ‫ﺃ‬
‫ﹲ‬
‫ﺔ‬َ‫ﺌ‬‫ﻤﺎ‬

‫ﻭ‬
‫ﹲ‬
‫ﻑ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻝ‬َ‫ﺃ‬
‫ﻥ‬ِ
‫ﻤ‬ ِ
‫ﺩ‬
‫ﺩ‬
‫ﻌ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ُ
‫ل‬‫ِﺜ‬
‫ﻤ‬
3
‫ﺇﻝﻰ‬
10
,

‫ﻥ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ 
‫ﺭ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻏ‬

‫ﺩ‬
‫ﺭ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬
‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻫ‬
‫ﺩ‬‫ﻭ‬
‫ﺩ‬‫ﻌ‬
‫ﻤ‬
.
‫ﻤﺜﺎل‬
:
‫ﹸ‬
‫ﺔ‬َ‫ﺌ‬‫ﻤﺎ‬

‫ﺠ‬
‫ﺭ‬
ٍ
‫ل‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﹸ‬
‫ﻑ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻝ‬َ‫ﺃ‬
َ‫ﺃ‬
‫ﺭ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍ‬
ٍ
‫ﺓ‬
.
ِ
‫ﺙ‬‫ﱠ‬
‫ﻨ‬َ‫ﺅ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ 
‫ﻭ‬ ِ
‫ﺭ‬‫ﱠ‬
‫ﻜ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ِﻠ‬
‫ﻝ‬ ‫ﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻫ‬ 
‫ﻭ‬
.

‫ﻭ‬
)
‫ِﻑ‬
‫ﻝ‬‫ﺍﻷ‬
(
‫ِﻲ‬
‫ﻓ‬
)
‫ﻤﺎﺌﺔ‬
(
‫ﺃ‬
‫ﺭ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻘ‬‫ﹸ‬
‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﻻ‬ 
‫ﻭ‬ 
‫ﺏ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﹸﻜ‬
‫ﺘ‬
.
Hundred and thousand
Hundred and thousand are similar to the numbers from 3 to 10, (in
construction) except that their 
‫ﺩ‬‫ﻭ‬
‫ﺩ‬‫ﻌ‬
‫ﻤ‬ (enumerated) is singular.
A hundred men
A thousand women
And they are (used) for masculine and feminine (enumerated).
And the alif in ‫ﻤﺎﺌﺔ‬ (hundred) is written but not pronounced.
‫ﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻭ‬
‫ﻻ‬
ِ
‫ﺏ‬ ‫ِﻲ‬
‫ﻀ‬‫ﺍﻝﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﹾﻔﻰ‬‫ﻨ‬
‫ﻴ‬
)
‫ﻤﺎ‬
(
ِ
‫ﺏ‬ 
‫ﻉ‬ِ
‫ﺭ‬‫ﻀﺎ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻭ‬
)
‫ﻻ‬
.(
‫ﻤﺜﺎل‬
:
‫ﻤﺎ‬

‫ﺱ‬‫ﺭ‬
‫ﺩ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ 
‫ﺩ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﺤ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ 
‫ﺏ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻜ‬
.
‫ﻤﺎ‬
ِ
‫ﻑ‬
‫ﺤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﺘ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ِﻝﻰ‬
‫ﺇ‬ ‫ﹸ‬
‫ﺕ‬‫ﺒ‬
‫ﻫ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬
.
‫ﻻ‬

‫ﺱ‬‫ﺭ‬
‫ﺩ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ 
‫ﺩ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫َﺤ‬‫ﺃ‬ 
‫ﺏ‬‫ﹸ‬
‫ﺘ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻜ‬
‫ﻴ‬
.
‫ﻻ‬
ِ
‫ﻑ‬
‫ﺤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﺘ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ِﻝﻰ‬
‫ﺇ‬ 
‫ﺏ‬
‫ﻫ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﺫ‬َ‫ﺃ‬
.
The past tense is negated with ‫ﻤﺎ‬
and the present tense with ‫ﻻ‬
I did not go to the
museum.
Ahmad did not write
the lesson.
I am not going to
the museum.
Ahmad is not writing
(up) the lesson.
Example
‫ﹾﺒﺎل‬‫ﻘ‬ِ
‫ﺘ‬‫ﺴ‬ِ
‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﹸ‬
‫ﻑ‬‫ﺭ‬
‫ﺤ‬
.
)
‫ﺱ‬
(
‫ﻤﺜﺎل‬
:

‫ﺴ‬
‫ﹰ‬
‫ﺍ‬‫ﹶﺩ‬‫ﻏ‬ 
‫ﺭ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ
‫ﺩ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ 
‫ﻊ‬ِ
‫ﺠ‬‫ﺭ‬
‫ﻴ‬
.

‫ﺴ‬
ُ
‫ﷲ‬‫ﺍ‬ 
‫ﺀ‬‫ﺸﺎ‬ ‫ﻥ‬ِ
‫ﺇ‬ ‫ﹶ‬‫ﺔ‬‫ﱠ‬
‫ﻜ‬
‫ﻤ‬ ‫ِﻝﻰ‬
‫ﺇ‬ 
‫ﺏ‬
‫ﻫ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﺫ‬َ‫ﺄ‬
.
ِ
‫ل‬‫ﻴ‬ِ
‫ﺼ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﱠ‬
‫ﺘ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﹸ‬
‫ﻑ‬‫ﺭ‬
‫ﺤ‬
.
)
‫ﺎ‬
‫ﻤ‬َ‫ﺃ‬
(
‫ﻤﺜﺎل‬
:
‫ﹸ؟‬
‫ﺔ‬‫ﱠ‬
‫ﻠ‬
‫ﺠ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ِ
‫ﻩ‬ِ
‫ﺫ‬‫ﻫ‬ 
‫ﻭ‬ 
‫ﺏ‬‫ِﺘﺎ‬
‫ﻜ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻫﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﻡ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻜ‬ِ
‫ﺒ‬
‫ﺎ‬
‫ﻤ‬َ‫ﺃ‬

‫ﺏ‬‫ِﺘﺎ‬
‫ﻜ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬
‫ﹶ‬‫ﻓ‬

‫ﻭ‬ ٍ
‫ﺕ‬‫ِﻴﺎﻻ‬
‫ﺭ‬ ِ
‫ﺓ‬
‫ﺭ‬‫ﺸ‬
‫ﻌ‬ِ
‫ﺒ‬ 
‫ﻭ‬
‫ﻬ‬
‫ﺎ‬
‫ﻤ‬َ‫ﺃ‬
‫ﹸ‬
‫ﺔ‬‫ﱠ‬
‫ﻠ‬
‫ﺠ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬
‫ﹶ‬‫ﻓ‬
ٍ
‫ﺕ‬‫ِﻴﺎﻻ‬
‫ﺭ‬ ِ
‫ﺔ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺜ‬‫ﹶﻼ‬‫ﺜ‬ِ
‫ﺒ‬ 
‫ﻲ‬ِ
‫ﻬ‬
.
How much is this book and this magazine? As for the book, then it for ten
riyals and as for the magazine then it is for three riyals.

‫ﻤ‬‫ﹸ‬
‫ﺘ‬‫ﻴ‬َ‫ﺃ‬
‫ﺭ‬ َ‫ﺃ‬ ‫ِﺘﺎﺒﻲ؟‬
‫ﻜ‬ 
‫ﻥ‬‫ﻴ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﹸ‬
‫ﺓ‬
‫ﻭ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﺨ‬ِ
‫ﺇ‬ ‫ﻴﺎ‬
‫ﻭ‬
‫؟‬
‫ﻩ‬
The letter of future tense
‫ﺱ‬
The head teacher shall return tomorrow
I will go to Mecca inshaa Allah
The preposition of explanation
‘As for’
Example
Oh brothers where is my book?
Have you seen it?
‫ﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻬ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬‫ﻴ‬
‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﹾ‬‫ﺕ‬
‫ﺩ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ
‫ﺯ‬ 
‫ﻥ‬‫ِﻴ‬
‫ﺒ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻁ‬‫ﺨﺎ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ِ
‫ﺭ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ
‫ﻤ‬
‫ﻀ‬ 
‫ﺩ‬‫ﻌ‬
‫ﺒ‬ ‫ِل‬
‫ﺼ‬‫ﱠ‬
‫ﺘ‬
‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺼ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬ 
‫ﺭ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ
‫ﻤ‬
‫ﻀ‬ 
‫ﻊ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻗ‬
‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻭ‬
‫ﻭ‬
.

‫ﻭ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬
:
‫ﻴ‬َ‫ﺃ‬
‫ﺭ‬ َ‫ﺃ‬
‫ﹸﻡ‬
‫ﺘ‬
+
‫ﻩ‬
=
َ‫ﺃ‬

‫ﻤ‬‫ﹸ‬
‫ﺘ‬‫ﻴ‬َ‫ﺃ‬
‫ﺭ‬
‫ﻭ‬

‫ﻩ‬
‫؟‬
ِ
‫ﻡ‬ِ
‫ﻝ‬‫ﺎ‬
‫ﺴ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ِ
‫ﺙ‬‫ﱠ‬
‫ﻨ‬َ‫ﺅ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ 
‫ﻊ‬‫ﻤ‬
‫ﺠ‬
.
When the attached pronoun of nasb occurs after the pronoun of
second person, ‫ﻭ‬ is increased between them.
‫ﻡ‬‫ﹸ‬
‫ﺘ‬ - pronoun of
second person.

‫ﻩ‬ - Attached
pronoun of nasb.
Increase
in‫ﻭ‬
Have you seen it?
(Plural masc. second person)
‫ﹲ‬
‫ﺓ‬‫ﹶﺴﺭ‬‫ﻜ‬ ِ
‫ﻪ‬ِ
‫ﺒ‬‫ﺼ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﹸ‬
‫ﺔ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﻼ‬
‫ﻋ‬ ِ
‫ﻡ‬ِ
‫ﻝ‬‫ﺎ‬
‫ﺴ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ِ
‫ﺙ‬‫ﱠ‬
‫ﻨ‬َ‫ﺅ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ 
‫ﻊ‬‫ﻤ‬
‫ﺠ‬ 
‫ﻭ‬
.
‫ﻤﺜﺎل‬
:
‫ِﻤ‬
‫ﻠ‬‫ﺴ‬
‫ﻤ‬
‫ﹲ‬
‫ﺕ‬‫ﺎ‬
‫ﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻴ‬‫ﺴ‬
‫ﹲ‬
‫ﺕ‬‫ﺍ‬
‫ِﺒ‬
‫ﻝ‬‫ﻁﺎ‬
‫ﹲ‬
‫ﺕ‬‫ﺎ‬

‫ﻭ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬
:
‫ﻤﺎﻭﺍ‬
‫ﺴ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ 
‫ﻭ‬ 
‫ﺭ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻘ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ 
‫ﻭ‬ 
‫ﺱ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﱠ‬
‫ﺸ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ 
‫ﻭ‬ 
‫ﺽ‬‫ﺭ‬َ‫ﻷ‬‫ﺍ‬ ُ
‫ﷲ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﹶ‬‫ﻕ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺨ‬
ِ
‫ﺕ‬
.
)
ِ
‫ﺕ‬‫ﻤﺎﻭﺍ‬
‫ﺴ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬
(
‫ﹲ‬
‫ﺓ‬
‫ﺭ‬‫ﹶﺴ‬‫ﻜ‬ ِ
‫ﻪ‬ِ
‫ﺒ‬‫ﺼ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﹸ‬
‫ﺔ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﻋﻼ‬ 
‫ﻭ‬ 
‫ﺏ‬‫ﻭ‬
‫ﺼ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻨ‬
‫ﻤ‬ ِ
‫ﻪ‬ِ
‫ﺒ‬ ٌ
‫ل‬‫ﻭ‬
‫ﻌ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬
‫ﻤ‬
.
‫ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ِ
‫ﻡ‬‫ﹾﻬﺎ‬‫ﻔ‬ِ
‫ﺘ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ﺍﻹ‬ ِ
‫ﺓ‬
‫ﺯ‬‫ﻤ‬
‫ﻫ‬ ُ
‫ل‬‫ﹸﻭ‬
‫ﺨ‬
‫ﺩ‬
)
‫ﺍل‬
.(
Students
Fem. pl.
Cars
Fem. pl.
Believers
Fem. pl.
And the sound feminine plural; its sign of nasb (accusative
case) is kasra.
Allah created the earth and the sun and the moon and the
skies.
ِ
‫ﺕ‬‫ﻤﺎﻭﺍ‬
‫ﺴ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ is an object it is in accusative case, and the sign of it being
accusative is a kasra.
The entering of ‘the hamza of questioning’ on al.
Example
‫ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ِ
‫ﻡ‬‫ﹾﻬﺎ‬‫ﻔ‬ِ
‫ﺘ‬‫ﺴ‬ِ
‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﹸ‬
‫ﺓ‬
‫ﺯ‬‫ﻤ‬
‫ﻫ‬ ‫ﹾ‬‫ﺕ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺨ‬
‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ‬
)
‫ﺍل‬
(
‫ﹸ‬
‫ﺓ‬
‫ﺯ‬‫ﻤ‬
‫ﻫ‬ ‫ﹾ‬‫ﺕ‬
‫ﺩ‬
‫ﻤ‬
)
‫ﺍل‬
.(
‫ﻤﺜﺎل‬
:
‫ِ؟‬
‫ﺭ‬‫ﺤ‬
‫ﺒ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ 
‫ﻊ‬‫ﻤ‬
‫ﺠ‬ 
‫ﺭ‬‫ِﺤﺎ‬
‫ﺒ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ َ‫ﺃ‬
=
‫ﺁ‬
‫ِ؟‬
‫ﺭ‬‫ﺤ‬
‫ﺒ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ 
‫ﻊ‬‫ﻤ‬
‫ﺠ‬ 
‫ﺭ‬‫ِﺤﺎ‬
‫ﺒ‬‫ﻝ‬
)
‫ﺃ‬
+
‫ﺍل‬
=
‫ﺁل‬
(
‫ﺁ‬
‫؟‬
‫ﻡ‬‫ﻭ‬
‫ﻴ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ 
‫ﺀ‬‫ﺠﺎ‬ 
‫ﺭ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ
‫ﺩ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﻝ‬
‫ﹸ‬
‫ﺔ‬
‫ﺒ‬‫ﱠ‬
‫ﻜ‬
‫ﺭ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ 
‫ﺩ‬‫ﺩﺍ‬‫ﻋ‬َ‫ﻷ‬‫ﺍ‬
.
Compound numbers
When ‘the hamza of questioning’ enters upon al, the
hamza of al is made to stretch.
Is Bihaar (rivers) the plural of bahr (river)?
Did the headmaster come today?
∗
ِ
‫ﻥ‬‫َﻴ‬‫ﺌ‬‫ﺯ‬
‫ﺠ‬ ‫ﻥ‬ِ
‫ﻤ‬ 
‫ﻥ‬
‫ﻭ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻜ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﹸ‬
‫ﺔ‬
‫ﺒ‬‫ﱠ‬
‫ﻜ‬
‫ﺭ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ 
‫ﺩ‬‫ﺩﺍ‬‫ﻋ‬‫ﺍﻷ‬
.
‫ﻤﺜ‬
‫ﺎل‬
:
Eleven
‫ﻤﺜﺎل‬
:

‫ﺭ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺸ‬
‫ﻋ‬ 
‫ﺩ‬
‫ﺤ‬َ‫ﺃ‬
↑
↑
‫ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻲ‬ 
‫ﺀ‬‫ﺯ‬
‫ﺠ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ُ
‫ل‬
‫ﻭ‬َ‫ﻷ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻝﺠﺯﺀ‬
∗
ِ
‫ﺢ‬‫ﹶﺘ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﹲ‬
‫ﺔ‬
‫ﻴ‬ِ
‫ﻨ‬‫ﺒ‬
‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﹸ‬
‫ﺔ‬
‫ﺒ‬‫ﱠ‬
‫ﻜ‬
‫ﺭ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ 
‫ﺩ‬‫ﺩﺍ‬‫ﻋ‬‫ﺍﻷ‬
,
‫ﱠ‬
‫ﺜ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ 
‫ﺀ‬‫ﻭﺍﻝﺠﺯ‬ ُ
‫ل‬
‫ﻭ‬‫ﺍﻷ‬ 
‫ﺀ‬‫ﺯ‬
‫ﺠ‬‫ﻓﺎﻝ‬
‫ِﻲ‬
‫ﻨ‬‫ﺎ‬
‫ﹶ‬‫ﺔ‬‫ﺍﻝﻔﺘﺤ‬ ِ
‫ﻥ‬‫ﺎ‬
‫ﺒ‬ِ
‫ﺤ‬
‫ﻴ‬
.
First part
Second part
Compound numbers are fixed (remain unchanged/undeclined) on fath so the
first and second part like the fatha.
Compound numbers are made of two parts.
‫ﻥ‬ِ
‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﹸ‬
‫ﺔ‬
‫ﺒ‬‫ﱠ‬
‫ﻜ‬
‫ﺭ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ 
‫ﺩ‬‫ﺩﺍ‬‫ﻋ‬‫ﺍﻷ‬
11
‫ﺇﻝﻰ‬
19
The numbers from 11 to 19
∗
‫ﻥ‬ِ
‫ﻤ‬ 
‫ﺩ‬‫ﻭ‬
‫ﺩ‬‫ﻌ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬
11
‫ﺇﻝﻰ‬
99

‫ﺏ‬‫ﻭ‬
‫ﺼ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻨ‬
‫ﻤ‬ 
‫ﺩ‬
‫ﺭ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬
‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﹰ‬
‫ﺎ‬‫ِﻤ‬
‫ﺌ‬‫ﺩﺍ‬
.
‫ﻤﺜﺎل‬
:

‫ﺩ‬
‫ﺤ‬َ‫ﺃ‬
‫ﹰ‬
‫ﺎ‬‫ِﺒ‬
‫ﻝ‬‫ﻁﺎ‬ 
‫ﺭ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺸ‬
‫ﻋ‬
.
‫ﹰ‬
‫ﺎ‬‫ﻁﺎﻝﺒ‬ 
‫ﻥ‬‫ﻭ‬
‫ﻌ‬‫ﺴ‬ِ
‫ﺘ‬ 
‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﹲ‬
‫ﺔ‬
‫ﻌ‬‫ﺴ‬ِ
‫ﺘ‬
.
‫ﹸ‬
‫ﺔ‬
‫ﺒ‬‫ﱠ‬
‫ﻜ‬
‫ﺭ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ 
‫ﺩ‬‫ﺩﺍ‬‫ﻋ‬‫ﺍﻷ‬
11
‫ﻭ‬
12
The numbers 11 and 12
∗
11
‫ﻭ‬
12
:
‫ﺍﻝﺠﺯﺀ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ُ
‫ل‬
‫ﻭ‬‫ﺍﻷ‬ ‫ﺍﻝﺠﺯﺀ‬ 
‫ﻥ‬‫ﹸﻭ‬
‫ﻜ‬
‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﹰ‬
‫ﺍ‬‫ﱠﺭ‬
‫ﻜ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬
‫ﻤ‬ 
‫ﺩ‬‫ﻭ‬
‫ﺩ‬‫ﻌ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻜﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﹰ‬
‫ﺍ‬‫ﺫﻜﺭ‬
‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻲ‬
The enumerated, from 11 to 99 is always single, mansoob.
99 students (male) 11 students (male)
If the ma’dood is masculine then the first part and the second
part are masculine.
‫ﻤﺜﺎل‬
:
Twelve Eleven
Male students Male students
‫ﻓﻲ‬
:

‫ﺩ‬
‫ﺤ‬َ‫ﺃ‬
‫ﹰ‬
‫ﺎ‬‫ِﺒ‬
‫ﻝ‬‫ﻁﺎ‬ 
‫ﺭ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺸ‬
‫ﻋ‬
‫ﻭ‬
‫ﹰ‬
‫ﺎ‬‫ِﺒ‬
‫ﻝ‬‫ﻁﺎ‬ 
‫ﺭ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺸ‬
‫ﻋ‬ ‫ﹾﻨﺎ‬‫ﺜ‬‫ﺍ‬
.
↑
↑
↑
↑
↑
↑
‫ﻤﺫﻜﺭ‬ ‫ﻤﺫﻜﺭ‬ ‫ﻤﺫﻜﺭ‬ ‫ﻤﺫﻜﺭ‬ ‫ﻤﺫﻜﺭ‬ ‫ﻤﺫﻜﺭ‬
‫ﻥ‬ِ
‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﹸ‬
‫ﺔ‬
‫ﺒ‬‫ﱠ‬
‫ﻜ‬
‫ﺭ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ 
‫ﺩ‬‫ﺩﺍ‬‫ﻋ‬‫ﺍﻷ‬
3
1
‫ﺇﻝﻰ‬
19
The numbers from 11 to 13
∗
‫ﻥ‬ِ
‫ﻤ‬
13
‫ﺇﻝﻰ‬
19
‫ﹰ‬
‫ﺍ‬‫ﱠﺭ‬
‫ﻜ‬‫ﺫ‬
‫ﻤ‬ 
‫ﺩ‬‫ﻭ‬
‫ﺩ‬‫ﻌ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻜﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ‬
,
‫ﹸ‬
‫ﻑ‬ِ
‫ﻝ‬‫ﺨﺎ‬
‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭل‬ 
‫ﺀ‬‫ﺯ‬
‫ﺠ‬‫ﻓﺎﻝ‬

‫ﺩ‬‫ﻭ‬
‫ﺩ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﺍﻝﻤ‬ ‫ﹸ‬
‫ﻕ‬ِ
‫ﻓ‬‫ﻭﺍ‬
‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﱠﺎﻨﻲ‬
‫ﺜ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻝﺠﺯﺀ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ 
‫ﺩ‬‫ﻭ‬
‫ﺩ‬‫ﻌ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬
.
ِ
‫ﺙ‬‫ﱠ‬
‫ﻨ‬َ‫ﺅ‬
‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ِ
‫ﺩ‬‫ﻭ‬
‫ﺩ‬‫ِﻠﻤﻌ‬
‫ﻝ‬ 
‫ﺱ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻜ‬
‫ﻌ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻭ‬
.
‫ﻤﺜﺎل‬
:
Thirteen Thirteen
Female students Male students
Masculine Masculine
If the enumerated (ma’dood) is masculine, then the first part
differs in gender with the enumerated (ma’dood) and the
second part agrees with the ma’dood. And the opposite is in
the case of the feminine ma’dood.
‫ﹰ‬
‫ﺎ‬‫ِﺒ‬
‫ﻝ‬‫ﻁﺎ‬ 
‫ﺭ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺸ‬
‫ﻋ‬ ‫ﹶ‬‫ﺔ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺜ‬‫ﹶﻼ‬‫ﺜ‬
‫ﹰ‬
‫ﺔ‬
‫ﺒ‬ِ
‫ﻝ‬‫ﻁﺎ‬ ‫ﹶ‬‫ﺓ‬‫ﻋﺸﺭ‬ ‫ﺜﻼﺙ‬
↑
↑
↑
↑
↑
↑
‫ﻤﺫﻜﺭ‬ ‫ﻤﺫﻜﺭ‬ ‫ﻤﺅﻨﺙ‬
‫ﻤﺫﻜﺭ‬
‫ﻤﺅﻨﺙ‬ ‫ﻤﺅﻨﺙ‬
feminine masculine
masculine feminine
madina.          books grammer notes.pdf
madina.          books grammer notes.pdf
madina.          books grammer notes.pdf
madina.          books grammer notes.pdf
madina.          books grammer notes.pdf
madina.          books grammer notes.pdf
madina.          books grammer notes.pdf
madina.          books grammer notes.pdf
madina.          books grammer notes.pdf
madina.          books grammer notes.pdf
madina.          books grammer notes.pdf
madina.          books grammer notes.pdf
madina.          books grammer notes.pdf
madina.          books grammer notes.pdf
madina.          books grammer notes.pdf
madina.          books grammer notes.pdf
madina.          books grammer notes.pdf
madina.          books grammer notes.pdf
madina.          books grammer notes.pdf
madina.          books grammer notes.pdf
madina.          books grammer notes.pdf
madina.          books grammer notes.pdf
madina.          books grammer notes.pdf
madina.          books grammer notes.pdf
madina.          books grammer notes.pdf
madina.          books grammer notes.pdf
madina.          books grammer notes.pdf
madina.          books grammer notes.pdf
madina.          books grammer notes.pdf
madina.          books grammer notes.pdf

More Related Content

Similar to madina. books grammer notes.pdf

Surah Al Baqarah ayah 8-16 word to word
Surah Al Baqarah ayah 8-16 word to wordSurah Al Baqarah ayah 8-16 word to word
Surah Al Baqarah ayah 8-16 word to word
Momina Mateen
 
English we use (the) ) before the definite nouns but in Arabic we useالَ befo...
English we use (the) ) before the definite nouns but in Arabic we useالَ befo...English we use (the) ) before the definite nouns but in Arabic we useالَ befo...
English we use (the) ) before the definite nouns but in Arabic we useالَ befo...
ssuser1b2e21
 
Presentation On Weak Syllables
Presentation On Weak SyllablesPresentation On Weak Syllables
Presentation On Weak Syllables
Dr. Cupid Lucid
 
Copy Of Presentation On Weak Syllables
Copy Of Presentation On Weak SyllablesCopy Of Presentation On Weak Syllables
Copy Of Presentation On Weak Syllables
Dr. Cupid Lucid
 
Presentation On Weak Syllables
Presentation On Weak SyllablesPresentation On Weak Syllables
Presentation On Weak Syllables
Dr. Cupid Lucid
 

Similar to madina. books grammer notes.pdf (20)

Nahw +10 day+wb+final
Nahw +10 day+wb+finalNahw +10 day+wb+final
Nahw +10 day+wb+final
 
1 acquaintance
1 acquaintance1 acquaintance
1 acquaintance
 
Tajweed Book.pdf
Tajweed Book.pdfTajweed Book.pdf
Tajweed Book.pdf
 
Tajweed for dummies by learn quran kids
Tajweed for dummies by learn quran kidsTajweed for dummies by learn quran kids
Tajweed for dummies by learn quran kids
 
NAHW_ 10-Day WB Final Key.pdf
NAHW_ 10-Day WB Final Key.pdfNAHW_ 10-Day WB Final Key.pdf
NAHW_ 10-Day WB Final Key.pdf
 
Nahw +10 day+wb+final+key
Nahw +10 day+wb+final+keyNahw +10 day+wb+final+key
Nahw +10 day+wb+final+key
 
Lesson 4 | Introduction to Sorf | Learn Arabic to Understand the Quran for Al...
Lesson 4 | Introduction to Sorf | Learn Arabic to Understand the Quran for Al...Lesson 4 | Introduction to Sorf | Learn Arabic to Understand the Quran for Al...
Lesson 4 | Introduction to Sorf | Learn Arabic to Understand the Quran for Al...
 
Arabic level-0-class-2
Arabic level-0-class-2Arabic level-0-class-2
Arabic level-0-class-2
 
Gettting to Know פעל Verbs
Gettting to Know פעל VerbsGettting to Know פעל Verbs
Gettting to Know פעל Verbs
 
Surah Al Baqarah ayah 8-16 word to word
Surah Al Baqarah ayah 8-16 word to wordSurah Al Baqarah ayah 8-16 word to word
Surah Al Baqarah ayah 8-16 word to word
 
4 past-tense-verb7
4 past-tense-verb74 past-tense-verb7
4 past-tense-verb7
 
Tajweed quran arb_eng_uthmani_audio
Tajweed quran arb_eng_uthmani_audioTajweed quran arb_eng_uthmani_audio
Tajweed quran arb_eng_uthmani_audio
 
Mysweetlord 06 08
Mysweetlord 06 08Mysweetlord 06 08
Mysweetlord 06 08
 
Madina book1-notes
Madina book1-notesMadina book1-notes
Madina book1-notes
 
English we use (the) ) before the definite nouns but in Arabic we useالَ befo...
English we use (the) ) before the definite nouns but in Arabic we useالَ befo...English we use (the) ) before the definite nouns but in Arabic we useالَ befo...
English we use (the) ) before the definite nouns but in Arabic we useالَ befo...
 
Presentation On Weak Syllables
Presentation On Weak SyllablesPresentation On Weak Syllables
Presentation On Weak Syllables
 
Madinah-book-1-notes
Madinah-book-1-notesMadinah-book-1-notes
Madinah-book-1-notes
 
Arabic level-0-class-7
Arabic level-0-class-7Arabic level-0-class-7
Arabic level-0-class-7
 
Copy Of Presentation On Weak Syllables
Copy Of Presentation On Weak SyllablesCopy Of Presentation On Weak Syllables
Copy Of Presentation On Weak Syllables
 
Presentation On Weak Syllables
Presentation On Weak SyllablesPresentation On Weak Syllables
Presentation On Weak Syllables
 

More from fa3el khair

%D8%A7%D9%84%D9%86%D8%B8%D9%85%20%D8%A7%D9%84%D8%AC%D9%84%D9%8A%20%D9%81%D9%8...
%D8%A7%D9%84%D9%86%D8%B8%D9%85%20%D8%A7%D9%84%D8%AC%D9%84%D9%8A%20%D9%81%D9%8...%D8%A7%D9%84%D9%86%D8%B8%D9%85%20%D8%A7%D9%84%D8%AC%D9%84%D9%8A%20%D9%81%D9%8...
%D8%A7%D9%84%D9%86%D8%B8%D9%85%20%D8%A7%D9%84%D8%AC%D9%84%D9%8A%20%D9%81%D9%8...
fa3el khair
 
dhm_llwT _9_(1).pdf
dhm_llwT                      _9_(1).pdfdhm_llwT                      _9_(1).pdf
dhm_llwT _9_(1).pdf
fa3el khair
 
ljwb_n_msl _lsm_14_(1).pdf
ljwb_n_msl               _lsm_14_(1).pdfljwb_n_msl               _lsm_14_(1).pdf
ljwb_n_msl _lsm_14_(1).pdf
fa3el khair
 

More from fa3el khair (20)

السيرة النبوية لخير البرية للشيخ عادل الشوربجي
السيرة النبوية لخير البرية للشيخ عادل الشوربجيالسيرة النبوية لخير البرية للشيخ عادل الشوربجي
السيرة النبوية لخير البرية للشيخ عادل الشوربجي
 
شرح_رسالة_ـــ_واجب_العبد_إذا_أمره_الله_بأمر_ـــ
شرح_رسالة_ـــ_واجب_العبد_إذا_أمره_الله_بأمر_ـــشرح_رسالة_ـــ_واجب_العبد_إذا_أمره_الله_بأمر_ـــ
شرح_رسالة_ـــ_واجب_العبد_إذا_أمره_الله_بأمر_ـــ
 
كتاب شرح الجامع لعبادة الله وحده للشيخ محمد سعيد رسلان
كتاب شرح  الجامع لعبادة الله وحده للشيخ محمد سعيد رسلانكتاب شرح  الجامع لعبادة الله وحده للشيخ محمد سعيد رسلان
كتاب شرح الجامع لعبادة الله وحده للشيخ محمد سعيد رسلان
 
أسرار من حياة فضيلة الشيخ عبد العزيز بن باز
أسرار من حياة فضيلة الشيخ عبد العزيز بن بازأسرار من حياة فضيلة الشيخ عبد العزيز بن باز
أسرار من حياة فضيلة الشيخ عبد العزيز بن باز
 
ما رواه. النقلة من أخبار الأكلة.pdf
ما رواه.        النقلة من أخبار الأكلة.pdfما رواه.        النقلة من أخبار الأكلة.pdf
ما رواه. النقلة من أخبار الأكلة.pdf
 
%D8%A7%D9%84%D9%86%D8%B8%D9%85%20%D8%A7%D9%84%D8%AC%D9%84%D9%8A%20%D9%81%D9%8...
%D8%A7%D9%84%D9%86%D8%B8%D9%85%20%D8%A7%D9%84%D8%AC%D9%84%D9%8A%20%D9%81%D9%8...%D8%A7%D9%84%D9%86%D8%B8%D9%85%20%D8%A7%D9%84%D8%AC%D9%84%D9%8A%20%D9%81%D9%8...
%D8%A7%D9%84%D9%86%D8%B8%D9%85%20%D8%A7%D9%84%D8%AC%D9%84%D9%8A%20%D9%81%D9%8...
 
مصحف_مجمع_ الملك_الفهد_باللون_الأخضر.pdf
مصحف_مجمع_ الملك_الفهد_باللون_الأخضر.pdfمصحف_مجمع_ الملك_الفهد_باللون_الأخضر.pdf
مصحف_مجمع_ الملك_الفهد_باللون_الأخضر.pdf
 
مصحف_مجمع_الملك_الفهد_باللون_البرتقالي.pdf
مصحف_مجمع_الملك_الفهد_باللون_البرتقالي.pdfمصحف_مجمع_الملك_الفهد_باللون_البرتقالي.pdf
مصحف_مجمع_الملك_الفهد_باللون_البرتقالي.pdf
 
مصحف_مجمع_الملك_الفهد_رواية_شعبة_عن_عاصم.pdf
مصحف_مجمع_الملك_الفهد_رواية_شعبة_عن_عاصم.pdfمصحف_مجمع_الملك_الفهد_رواية_شعبة_عن_عاصم.pdf
مصحف_مجمع_الملك_الفهد_رواية_شعبة_عن_عاصم.pdf
 
مصحف_مجمع_الملك_الفهد_رواية_الدوري_عن_أبي_عمرو_البصري.pdf
مصحف_مجمع_الملك_الفهد_رواية_الدوري_عن_أبي_عمرو_البصري.pdfمصحف_مجمع_الملك_الفهد_رواية_الدوري_عن_أبي_عمرو_البصري.pdf
مصحف_مجمع_الملك_الفهد_رواية_الدوري_عن_أبي_عمرو_البصري.pdf
 
التفسير الميسر من سورة الأنبياء حتي سورة الناس.pdf
التفسير الميسر من سورة الأنبياء حتي سورة الناس.pdfالتفسير الميسر من سورة الأنبياء حتي سورة الناس.pdf
التفسير الميسر من سورة الأنبياء حتي سورة الناس.pdf
 
التفسير الميسر من البداية حتي نهاية سورة طه.pdf
التفسير الميسر من البداية حتي نهاية سورة طه.pdfالتفسير الميسر من البداية حتي نهاية سورة طه.pdf
التفسير الميسر من البداية حتي نهاية سورة طه.pdf
 
dhm_llwT _9_(1).pdf
dhm_llwT                      _9_(1).pdfdhm_llwT                      _9_(1).pdf
dhm_llwT _9_(1).pdf
 
ljwb_n_msl _lsm_14_(1).pdf
ljwb_n_msl               _lsm_14_(1).pdfljwb_n_msl               _lsm_14_(1).pdf
ljwb_n_msl _lsm_14_(1).pdf
 
tHrym_lnrd_w_lshTrnj_ w_lmlhy_8.pdf
tHrym_lnrd_w_lshTrnj_          w_lmlhy_8.pdftHrym_lnrd_w_lshTrnj_          w_lmlhy_8.pdf
tHrym_lnrd_w_lshTrnj_ w_lmlhy_8.pdf
 
db _lnfws_7.pdf
db                          _lnfws_7.pdfdb                          _lnfws_7.pdf
db _lnfws_7.pdf
 
فضل قيام الليل والتهجد.pdf
فضل قيام               الليل والتهجد.pdfفضل قيام               الليل والتهجد.pdf
فضل قيام الليل والتهجد.pdf
 
lrbwn_Hdyth_ m_lshrH_5.pdf
lrbwn_Hdyth_               m_lshrH_5.pdflrbwn_Hdyth_               m_lshrH_5.pdf
lrbwn_Hdyth_ m_lshrH_5.pdf
 
lrbwn_ Hdyth_5.pdf
lrbwn_                       Hdyth_5.pdflrbwn_                       Hdyth_5.pdf
lrbwn_ Hdyth_5.pdf
 
ktb_ lGrb_4.pdf
ktb_                            lGrb_4.pdfktb_                            lGrb_4.pdf
ktb_ lGrb_4.pdf
 

Recently uploaded

Authentic black magic, Kala jadu expert in Karachi and Kala ilam expert in Si...
Authentic black magic, Kala jadu expert in Karachi and Kala ilam expert in Si...Authentic black magic, Kala jadu expert in Karachi and Kala ilam expert in Si...
Authentic black magic, Kala jadu expert in Karachi and Kala ilam expert in Si...
baharayali
 
Popular black magic, Black magic specialist in Pakistan Or Kala jadu expert i...
Popular black magic, Black magic specialist in Pakistan Or Kala jadu expert i...Popular black magic, Black magic specialist in Pakistan Or Kala jadu expert i...
Popular black magic, Black magic specialist in Pakistan Or Kala jadu expert i...
baharayali
 
Topmost black magic, Black magic specialist in Malaysia Or kala jadu sifli il...
Topmost black magic, Black magic specialist in Malaysia Or kala jadu sifli il...Topmost black magic, Black magic specialist in Malaysia Or kala jadu sifli il...
Topmost black magic, Black magic specialist in Malaysia Or kala jadu sifli il...
baharayali
 
Amazing Grace - John Newton (Hymn) PPTX-Worship v1.pptx
Amazing Grace - John Newton (Hymn) PPTX-Worship v1.pptxAmazing Grace - John Newton (Hymn) PPTX-Worship v1.pptx
Amazing Grace - John Newton (Hymn) PPTX-Worship v1.pptx
JessalynArancoSalvac
 
Powerful black magic, Bangali Amil baba in Rawalpindi and Kala jadu specialis...
Powerful black magic, Bangali Amil baba in Rawalpindi and Kala jadu specialis...Powerful black magic, Bangali Amil baba in Rawalpindi and Kala jadu specialis...
Powerful black magic, Bangali Amil baba in Rawalpindi and Kala jadu specialis...
makhmalhalaaay
 
原版定制英国布莱顿大学毕业证原件一模一样
原版定制英国布莱顿大学毕业证原件一模一样原版定制英国布莱顿大学毕业证原件一模一样
原版定制英国布莱顿大学毕业证原件一模一样
SDSA
 
Topmost black magic, Bangali Amil baba in Lahore and Kala jadu specialist in ...
Topmost black magic, Bangali Amil baba in Lahore and Kala jadu specialist in ...Topmost black magic, Bangali Amil baba in Lahore and Kala jadu specialist in ...
Topmost black magic, Bangali Amil baba in Lahore and Kala jadu specialist in ...
baharayali
 
Real black magic, Kala jadu specialist in Multan and Kala ilam specialist in ...
Real black magic, Kala jadu specialist in Multan and Kala ilam specialist in ...Real black magic, Kala jadu specialist in Multan and Kala ilam specialist in ...
Real black magic, Kala jadu specialist in Multan and Kala ilam specialist in ...
baharayali
 
Famous Kala ilam, Black magic specialist in Malaysia Or kala jadu sifli ilam ...
Famous Kala ilam, Black magic specialist in Malaysia Or kala jadu sifli ilam ...Famous Kala ilam, Black magic specialist in Malaysia Or kala jadu sifli ilam ...
Famous Kala ilam, Black magic specialist in Malaysia Or kala jadu sifli ilam ...
baharayali
 

Recently uploaded (20)

kala jadu in canada | amil baba pakistan \ black magic expert in UK
kala jadu in canada | amil baba pakistan \ black magic expert in UKkala jadu in canada | amil baba pakistan \ black magic expert in UK
kala jadu in canada | amil baba pakistan \ black magic expert in UK
 
Authentic black magic, Kala jadu expert in Karachi and Kala ilam expert in Si...
Authentic black magic, Kala jadu expert in Karachi and Kala ilam expert in Si...Authentic black magic, Kala jadu expert in Karachi and Kala ilam expert in Si...
Authentic black magic, Kala jadu expert in Karachi and Kala ilam expert in Si...
 
English - The Book of Leviticus the Third Book of Moses.pdf
English - The Book of Leviticus the Third Book of Moses.pdfEnglish - The Book of Leviticus the Third Book of Moses.pdf
English - The Book of Leviticus the Third Book of Moses.pdf
 
Kala ilam, Black magic specialist in Lahore +923338228883 Kala ilam expert in...
Kala ilam, Black magic specialist in Lahore +923338228883 Kala ilam expert in...Kala ilam, Black magic specialist in Lahore +923338228883 Kala ilam expert in...
Kala ilam, Black magic specialist in Lahore +923338228883 Kala ilam expert in...
 
Popular black magic, Black magic specialist in Pakistan Or Kala jadu expert i...
Popular black magic, Black magic specialist in Pakistan Or Kala jadu expert i...Popular black magic, Black magic specialist in Pakistan Or Kala jadu expert i...
Popular black magic, Black magic specialist in Pakistan Or Kala jadu expert i...
 
Deerfoot Church of Christ Bulletin 5 19 24
Deerfoot Church of Christ Bulletin 5 19 24Deerfoot Church of Christ Bulletin 5 19 24
Deerfoot Church of Christ Bulletin 5 19 24
 
Topmost black magic, Black magic specialist in Malaysia Or kala jadu sifli il...
Topmost black magic, Black magic specialist in Malaysia Or kala jadu sifli il...Topmost black magic, Black magic specialist in Malaysia Or kala jadu sifli il...
Topmost black magic, Black magic specialist in Malaysia Or kala jadu sifli il...
 
Amazing Grace - John Newton (Hymn) PPTX-Worship v1.pptx
Amazing Grace - John Newton (Hymn) PPTX-Worship v1.pptxAmazing Grace - John Newton (Hymn) PPTX-Worship v1.pptx
Amazing Grace - John Newton (Hymn) PPTX-Worship v1.pptx
 
amil baba in uk-top amil baba-asli amil baba kala jadu amil baba top 10 amil ...
amil baba in uk-top amil baba-asli amil baba kala jadu amil baba top 10 amil ...amil baba in uk-top amil baba-asli amil baba kala jadu amil baba top 10 amil ...
amil baba in uk-top amil baba-asli amil baba kala jadu amil baba top 10 amil ...
 
Powerful black magic, Bangali Amil baba in Rawalpindi and Kala jadu specialis...
Powerful black magic, Bangali Amil baba in Rawalpindi and Kala jadu specialis...Powerful black magic, Bangali Amil baba in Rawalpindi and Kala jadu specialis...
Powerful black magic, Bangali Amil baba in Rawalpindi and Kala jadu specialis...
 
原版定制英国布莱顿大学毕业证原件一模一样
原版定制英国布莱顿大学毕业证原件一模一样原版定制英国布莱顿大学毕业证原件一模一样
原版定制英国布莱顿大学毕业证原件一模一样
 
Topmost black magic, Bangali Amil baba in Lahore and Kala jadu specialist in ...
Topmost black magic, Bangali Amil baba in Lahore and Kala jadu specialist in ...Topmost black magic, Bangali Amil baba in Lahore and Kala jadu specialist in ...
Topmost black magic, Bangali Amil baba in Lahore and Kala jadu specialist in ...
 
Reflections and Aspirations for Wesak 2024 (Eng. & Chi.).pptx
Reflections and Aspirations for Wesak  2024  (Eng. & Chi.).pptxReflections and Aspirations for Wesak  2024  (Eng. & Chi.).pptx
Reflections and Aspirations for Wesak 2024 (Eng. & Chi.).pptx
 
The Spiritist Prayers - By Cairbar Schutel
The Spiritist Prayers - By Cairbar SchutelThe Spiritist Prayers - By Cairbar Schutel
The Spiritist Prayers - By Cairbar Schutel
 
Real black magic, Kala jadu specialist in Multan and Kala ilam specialist in ...
Real black magic, Kala jadu specialist in Multan and Kala ilam specialist in ...Real black magic, Kala jadu specialist in Multan and Kala ilam specialist in ...
Real black magic, Kala jadu specialist in Multan and Kala ilam specialist in ...
 
Astrologer No 1 Amil Baba In UK Kala Jadu In UK Amil baba In UK Address Amil ...
Astrologer No 1 Amil Baba In UK Kala Jadu In UK Amil baba In UK Address Amil ...Astrologer No 1 Amil Baba In UK Kala Jadu In UK Amil baba In UK Address Amil ...
Astrologer No 1 Amil Baba In UK Kala Jadu In UK Amil baba In UK Address Amil ...
 
What is SPECIAL ABOUT SANATANA DHARMA.pptx
What is SPECIAL ABOUT SANATANA DHARMA.pptxWhat is SPECIAL ABOUT SANATANA DHARMA.pptx
What is SPECIAL ABOUT SANATANA DHARMA.pptx
 
Famous Kala ilam, Black magic specialist in Malaysia Or kala jadu sifli ilam ...
Famous Kala ilam, Black magic specialist in Malaysia Or kala jadu sifli ilam ...Famous Kala ilam, Black magic specialist in Malaysia Or kala jadu sifli ilam ...
Famous Kala ilam, Black magic specialist in Malaysia Or kala jadu sifli ilam ...
 
Kala jadu, Kala ilam expert in Multan +923338228883 Black magic specialist in...
Kala jadu, Kala ilam expert in Multan +923338228883 Black magic specialist in...Kala jadu, Kala ilam expert in Multan +923338228883 Black magic specialist in...
Kala jadu, Kala ilam expert in Multan +923338228883 Black magic specialist in...
 
Monthly Khazina-e-Ruhaniyaat May’2024 (Vol.15, Issue 1)
Monthly Khazina-e-Ruhaniyaat May’2024 (Vol.15, Issue 1)Monthly Khazina-e-Ruhaniyaat May’2024 (Vol.15, Issue 1)
Monthly Khazina-e-Ruhaniyaat May’2024 (Vol.15, Issue 1)
 

madina. books grammer notes.pdf

  • 1. 1 ِ‫ﻢ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﺣ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ ِ‫ﻦ‬‫ﻤـ‬‫ﺣ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ ِ‫ﻪ‬‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﻠ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ ِ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺴ‬ِ‫ﺑ‬ Arabic Grammar Rules for Madeenah Book One  ‫ﺕ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻛ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ُ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﺛ‬‫ﱠﻼ‬ ‫ﺜ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ The three vowel markings ٌ‫ﺔ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻓ‬ fathah َ- ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺿ‬ ٌ - ُ hdhamma ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻛ‬ kasrah ِ- (a) (u) (i) ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻥ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻜ‬ ‫ﺳ‬ - ْ Sukoon ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﺓ‬ ‫ﺪ‬‫ﺷ‬ - ّ shaddah  ‫ﻦ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﻮ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ : at-tanween ِ‫ﻥ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻓ‬ - ً fathataan - (an) ِ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺿ‬ ٌ- dhammataan - (un) ِ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺗ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻛ‬ - kasrataan ٍ- (in) When vowel markings are doubled at the end of a word they are called  ‫ﻦ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﻮ‬‫ﻨ‬‫ﺗ‬ (tanween). The additional vowel at the end of a word represents a ‫ﹾ‬‫ﻥ‬ (noon saakinah). The ‫ﹾ‬‫ﻥ‬ is not written but is only pronounced. e.g. ‫ﹾ‬‫ﻥ‬ ‫ﺪ‬ِ‫ﺠ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ﻣ‬ -ٌ ‫ِﺪ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ﻣ‬
  • 2. 2 The Arabic language is made up of  ‫ﺕ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻤ‬ِ‫ﻠ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻛ‬ (words) and these words are of three types they are known as:  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬ - Particle / Letter ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻞ‬‫ﻌ‬ِ‫ﻓ‬ - Action / Verb  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬ - Noun  ‫ﺖ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﺑ‬ - house ‫ﺐ‬‫ﻫ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬ - went , / to go ‫ِﱃ‬‫ﺇ‬ - to ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ُ : ٍ‫ﺖ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﺑ‬ ‫ﹶﻰ‬‫ﻟ‬ِ‫ﺇ‬ ‫ﺐ‬‫ﻫ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬ He went to a house : ceSenten The table below shows the properties of an  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬ (noun): Examples Translation Properties ٌ‫ﺔ‬‫ﺒ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻃ‬ ، ‫ﺐ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻃ‬ Masculine, feminine ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﺚ‬ ‫ﻧ‬‫ﺆ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ ، ‫ﺮ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻛ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺬ‬ ‫ﻣ‬  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﱠﺎ‬ ‫ﻠ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻃ‬ ،ِ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺒ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻃ‬ ، ‫ﺐ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻃ‬ Singular, dual, plural  ‫ﻊ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﺟ‬ ،‫ﻰ‬ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺜ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ ، ‫ﺩ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬ ‫ﻣ‬  ‫ﺖ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﺑ‬ ، ‫ﺐ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻃ‬ Intellect, non-intellect ٍ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻗ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻋ‬  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻏ‬ ،‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻗ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻋ‬  ‫ﺐ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﱠﺎ‬ ‫ﻄ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ ، ‫ﺐ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻃ‬ Indefinite, definite ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻓ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﻣ‬ ،‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺮ‬ِ‫ﻜ‬‫ﻧ‬ ٌ ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺮ‬ِ‫ﻜ‬‫ﻧ‬ is when an ism is indefinite or not specific, it is general i.e., the ism  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺘ‬ِ‫ﻛ‬ ‘a book’ this can be any book from the different types of books. ‫ﻌ‬‫ﻣ‬ ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻓ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬ ٌ is when an ism is definite or specific, it is not general i.e., the ism  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺘ‬ِ‫ﻜ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‘the book’ or  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺘ‬ِ‫ﻛ‬ ٍ‫ﺪ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺤ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ ‘Muhammad’s book’, here the book is a particular book not just any book in general. An ism in the Arabic language can be ‫ﻰ‬ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺜ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ (dual) meaning it shows upon two i.e., the ism ِ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺒ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻃ‬ means ‘two students’ this is done by adding ِ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺍ‬ (alif and noon)at the end of an ism.
  • 3. 3 An ism can be ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻗ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻋ‬ possess intellect such as humans, angels and jinns or it can be ٍ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻗ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻋ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻏ‬ possess no intellect such as animals, objects, trees e.t.c. The ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻞ‬‫ﺻ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺃ‬ (Asl) origin of an ism is that it carries ِ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺿ‬ ٌ - ‘two dhammas’ (tanween) on the last letter of the word. The tanween generally is also a sign showing that the ism is ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺮ‬ِ‫ﻜ‬‫ﻧ‬ (indefinite), however there is an exception to this because you will find that Arabic male names such as  ‫ﺱ‬‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﻋ‬، ‫ﺪ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺤ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ accept tanween but they are ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻓ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﻣ‬ ٌ (definite). The tanween is the Arabic indefinite article corresponding to the English ‘a’/ ‘an’.
  • 4. 4  ‫ﺪ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬  ‫ﺱ‬‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻝ‬ ‫ﻭ‬َ‫ﻷ‬‫ﺍ‬ (١) ‫ﻫ‬ ‫ﹶ‬‫ﺬ‬ ‫ﹾ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﺖ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﺑ‬ is a house This ‫ﹾ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻫ‬ - ِ‫ﻪ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﺒ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ِﻠ‬‫ﻟ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬ Letter to bring to attention or alert  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬ ِ‫ﻪ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﺒ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ِﻠ‬‫ﻟ‬ is a letter that is used to alert or to bring to attention the person who is being addressed and it is mostly connected to ِ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺷ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ ُ ‫ﺀ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﺳ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺃ‬ (nouns of indication). ‫ﹾ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬ - ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬ ِ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺷ‬ noun of indication ‫ﹾ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬ is pronounced as ‫ﹶﺍ‬‫ﺫ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻫ‬, but it is written without the first alif. The ِ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺷ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬ is used to point or indicate to people, animals, objects things which can be felt or touched and can also indicate to things that have meaning such as  ‫ﻱ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﺃ‬‫ﺭ‬ ‘opinion’ or  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ‫ﻋ‬ ‘knowledge’. ‫ﹾ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ‫ﻋ‬  ‫ﻊ‬ِ‫ﻓ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻧ‬ This is beneficial knowledge
  • 5. 5 The table below shows the properties of the  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬ ِ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺷ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ ) ‫ﹾ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬ ( Indicates,points to ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺷ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﹶﻰ‬‫ﻟ‬ِ‫ﺇ‬ the near  ‫ﺐ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻘ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ The masculine  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻛ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺬ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ the singular  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻔ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ The  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬ ِ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺷ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ is ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻓ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﻣ‬ ٌ (definite). It can be used to indicate or point to those possessing intellect ‫ﻋ‬ ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻗ‬‫ﺎ‬ or things that do not possess intellect ٍ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻗ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻋ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻏ‬. ‫ﺎ‬‫ﻣ‬ -  ‫ﻡ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻬ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬ِ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺇ‬  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬ Interrogative or Questioning Noun The Interrogative Noun ‘‫ﺎ‬‫ﻣ‬’ is used to ask a question about something that does not possess intellect ٍ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻗ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻋ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻏ‬ and it always comes at the beginning of a sentence. When a word comes at the beginning of a sentence it is called in Arabic ِ‫ﺔ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﺪ‬‫ﺻ‬. ‫ﺎ‬‫ﻣ‬ ‫ﹶﺍ‬‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬ ‫؟‬ ? is this What ‫ﹶ‬‫ﺃ‬ -  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬ ِ‫ﻡ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻬ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬ِ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ ، ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺰ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﻫ‬ ِ‫ﻡ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻬ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬ِ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ Particle/Letter of interrogation or questioning or also known as the Interrogative Hamzah. The ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺰ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﻫ‬ ِ‫ﻡ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻬ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬ِ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ comes at the beginning of the sentence as do all the nouns or particles of questioning. It can be used to ask a question about those possessing intellect as well as the things that do not possess intellect.
  • 6. 6 ‫ﹶ‬‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﹶﺍ‬‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬ ‫؟‬ ‫ﺖ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﺑ‬ ? this a house Is ‫ﹶ‬‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﹶﺍ‬‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬ ‫؟‬ ‫ﺪ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﻭ‬ Is this a boy? ‫ﻢ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﻧ‬ - ٍ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﺟ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬ Letter of answer or reply ‫ﻻ‬ -  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬ ٍ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﺟ‬ ِ‫ﻭ‬ ٍ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻔ‬‫ﻧ‬ Letter/particle of answer and negation The particle of reply ‫ﻢ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﻧ‬ is used to reply to a question with affirmation whereas the particle ‫ﻻ‬ is used to reply to a question with negation. ‫ﹶ‬‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﹶﺍ‬‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬ ‫؟‬ ‫ﻢ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻗ‬ Is this a pen?  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻗ‬ ‫ﹶﺍ‬‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬،‫ﻢ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﻧ‬ . Yes this is a pen ‫؟‬ ‫ﺺ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻗ‬ ‫ﹶﺍ‬‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬ ‫ﹶ‬‫ﺃ‬ Is this a shirt?  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻗ‬ ‫ﹶﺍ‬‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬،‫ﻻ‬ ‫؟‬ No, this is a pen. ‫ﻦ‬‫ﻣ‬ – ِ‫ﻡ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻬ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬ِ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬ Noun of interrogation/questioning This interrogative noun is used to ask a question about those who possess intellect ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻗ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻋ‬ ‫ﻦ‬‫ﻣ‬ ‫ﹸ؟‬ ‫ﻞ‬ ‫ﺟ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ‬ Who is this man? ‫؟‬ - ‫ﻋ‬ ‫ﻬ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬ِ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ ُ‫ﺔ‬‫ﻣ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻠ‬ ‫ﺎﻡ‬ ِ Question mark
  • 7. 7 ) ٢ ( ‫ِﻲ‬‫ﻧ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﺜ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬  ‫ﺱ‬‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﺪ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ ‫ﻚ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬ - ِ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ِﺷﺎ‬‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬ Noun of indication/pointing ‫ﻭ‬  ‫ﺖ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﺑ‬ ‫ﺬﺍ‬‫ﻫ‬ ‫ﻚ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬  ‫ﺪ‬ِ‫ﺠ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ﻣ‬ is a mosque that This is a house and ‫ﻚ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬ is a noun of indication it is used to indicate/point to objects or people that are distant or far. ‫ﻚ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬ can be broken down into three parts: ‫ﹶﺍ‬‫ﺫ‬ - ِ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ِﺷﺎ‬‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬ Noun of indication ِ‫ﻝ‬ – ‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬  ‫ﻡ‬‫ﹶﻟﻼ‬‫ﺍ‬ ِ‫ﻌ‬ ِ‫ﺪ‬ The laam is for the far/distant ‫ﻙ‬ -  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻄ‬ِ‫ﺧ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬ Particle of address Some of the grammarians say that the ‘‫ﻙ‬’ particle of address also indicates upon far/distant and the ‘ِ‫ﻝ‬’ shows upon even more or increased furtherness/distance. The letter/particle of address ‘‫ﻙ‬’ is used if the person or object we are addressing is masculine.
  • 8. 8 The table below shows the properties of ‫ﻚ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬: Indicates,points to ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺷ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﹶﻰ‬‫ﻟ‬ِ‫ﺇ‬ The far/distant  ‫ﺪ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻌ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ The masculine  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻛ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺬ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ the singular  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻔ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ All the ِ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺷ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ ُ ‫ﺀ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﺳ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺃ‬ nouns of indication are ٌ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻓ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﻣ‬ definite. ‫ﻚ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬ is pronounced ‫ﻚ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶﺍ‬‫ﺫ‬ but is written without the alif. Some of the grammarians say that the ِ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺷ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ ُ ‫ﺀ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﺳ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺃ‬ have three levels ‫ﺐ‬ِ‫ﺗ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻣ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺙ‬‫ﺛﻼ‬ : ‫ﹶﺍ‬‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬ – ِ‫ﺐ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻘ‬‫ِﻠ‬‫ﻟ‬ For the near/close ‫ﻚ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬ - ِ‫ﺪ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻌ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬ For the far/distant ‫ﻙ‬‫ﹶﺍ‬‫ﺫ‬ - ِ‫ﻂ‬‫ﺳ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬ For the middle between near and far ‫ﻻ‬  ‫ﻊ‬ِِ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﻳ‬ ِ‫ﺪ‬‫ﻌ‬ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻡ‬‫ﻻ‬‫ﻭ‬ ِ‫ﻪ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﺒ‬‫ﻨ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ِﻠ‬‫ﻟ‬ ‫ﺎ‬‫ﻫ‬ The particle of alert/bringing to attention and the laam indicating upon the distant or far will never come together in a noun of indication i.e; ‫ﻚ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻫ‬-this is wrong ‘‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﺄ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻄ‬‫ﺧ‬’.
  • 9. 9 ) ٣ ( ‫ﹶ‬‫ﺜ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬  ‫ﺱ‬‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﺪ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺚ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﹾ‬‫ﻝ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ - ‫ﻌ‬‫ﺗ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬  ‫ﻒ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬ (al) Definite Particle The definite particle ‫ﹾ‬‫ﻝ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ is prefixed to an ism which is ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺮ‬ِ‫ﻜ‬‫ﻧ‬ (indefinite) and it causes it to become ٌ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻓ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﻣ‬ (definite), and it also causes the tanween at the end to be dropped. The definite particle (al) corresponds to the English ‘the’. ‫ﹶﺍ‬‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬ ٌ َِْ . doctor a This is ‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﺐ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﺒ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻄ‬‫ﻟ‬ ٌ ِ َ . doctor is sitting The The Arabic alphabet consists of 28 letters. Of these 14 are called Solar Letters ُ ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﺴ‬‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﺸ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺮ‬ ‫ﺤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬, and the other 14 are called Lunar Letters ُ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻘ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺮ‬ ‫ﺤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ . In the articulation of the Solar Letters the tip or the blade of the tongue is involved in the pronunciation. The tip or the blade of the tongue does not play any part in the articulation of the Lunar Letters, (refer to lesson 3, pg.19 Madinah bk.1). When ‫ﹾ‬‫ﻝ‬‫ﺍ‬ is prefixed to an ism beginning with a Solar Letter the laam of ‘al’ is not pronounced but is written, and the first letter of the ism takes a shaddah – ّ . For example,  ‫ﺲ‬‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﺸ‬‫ﹶﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ (ash-shamsu). When ‫ﹾ‬‫ﻝ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ is prefixed to an ism beginning with a Lunar Letter the laam of ‘al’ is pronounced and written. For example,  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻘ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ (al-qamaru). In the definite particle ‫ﹾ‬‫ﻝ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ (al) the ‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ (a) is known as ِ‫ﻞ‬‫ﺻ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺰ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﻫ‬ the Connecting Hamzah. If it is not preceded by a word it will be
  • 10. 10 pronounced with the vowel marking َ- (fathah). If it is preceded by a word it is dropped in pronunciation, though remains in writing. ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﺜ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬ :  ‫ﺲ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺟ‬  ‫ﺐ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻄ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﺱ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﺪ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﻭ‬  ‫ﻒ‬ِ‫ﻗ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﻭ‬ The student is sitting and the teacher is standing, (wa l-mudarrisu…). ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ُﺍ‬‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ ُ is a beneficial sentence ) ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺪ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻔ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ٌ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﺟ‬ ( , and it is made up of 2 parts known as ‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﺨ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﻭ‬ ُ‫ﺃ‬‫ﺪ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬َ(al-mubtada wa l-khabar). ‫ﺃ‬‫ﺪ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ (1) ‫ﺃ‬‫ﺪ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ is from the Arabic word ُ ‫ﺀ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﺪ‬ِ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺑ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ meaning the beginning or starting, and from its origin is that it comes at the beginning of the sentence. (2) ‫ﺪ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺃ‬ is an ism that is the subject of talk or discussion. (3) ‫ﺪ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺃ‬ is  ‫ﻉ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻓ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻣ‬ (marfoo’) meaning it takes a dhammah or dhammataan on the last letter of the ism. (4) ‫ﺪ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺃ‬ in its ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻞ‬‫ﺻ‬‫ﺃ‬ (origin) precedes  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﺨ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ (the khabar). (5) ‫ﺃ‬‫ﺪ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ in its ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻞ‬‫ﺻ‬‫ﺃ‬ (origin) is ٌ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻓ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﻣ‬ (definite). ُ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ ُ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﺨ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﺮ‬ ‫ﺃ‬‫ﺪ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ُ
  • 11. 11  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﺨ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ (1)  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﺨ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ is that which comes after ‫ﺪ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺃ‬ in its ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻞ‬‫ﺻ‬‫ﺃ‬ (origin). (2)  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﺨ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ gives information or news about ‫ﺃ‬‫ﺪ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬, and by which it completes a benefit with ‫ﺃ‬‫ﺪ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬. (3)  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﺨ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ in its ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻞ‬‫ﺻ‬‫ﺃ‬ (origin) is ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺮ‬ِ‫ﻜ‬‫ﻧ‬ (indefinite). (4)  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﺨ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ is  ‫ﻉ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻓ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻣ‬ (marfoo’) meaning it takes a dhammah or dhammataan on the last letter of the ism. ُ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ُﺍ‬‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﺪ‬ِ‫ﺠ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﺐ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻗ‬ The mosque is near. ‫ﺃ‬‫ﺪ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﺨ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬
  • 12. 12 (٤)  ‫ﻊ‬ِ‫ﺑ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬  ‫ﺱ‬‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﺪ‬‫ﹶﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ) 1 ( is a Letter/Particle that enters upon an ism only. (2)  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ changes the state of the ism to  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﻣ‬  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻭ‬ (majroor), meaning the ism takes kasrah/kasrataan on the last letter. (3)  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ can have many meanings and its meaning is not known or complete until it enters upon a sentence. Then its exact meaning is known from the context of the sentence.  ‫ﻉ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻓ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻣ‬  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬  ‫ﺖ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ ِ‫ﺖ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻓ‬  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﻣ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ - Particle of Jarr ‫ﻦ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬ From- ‫ﹶﻰ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻋ‬ On/Above- ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻓ‬ - In
  • 13. 13  ‫ﺪ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺤ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻓ‬ ِ‫ﺖ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ the house in Muhammad is ‫ﻦ‬‫ﻳ‬‫ﺃ‬ –  ‫ﻡ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻬ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬ِ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬ ِ‫ﻥ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻜ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬ Noun of Questioning f or Place  ‫ﻡ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻬ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬ِ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬ ِ‫ﻥ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻜ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬ is an ism which is used to ask a question about the whereabouts of someone/something. ‫ﻦ‬‫ﻳ‬‫ﺃ‬ ‫؟‬ ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺘ‬ِ‫ﻜ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ? is the book Where ‫ﻮ‬ ‫ﻫ‬ ‫ِ؟‬‫ﺐ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻜ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﹶﻰ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻋ‬ It is on the desk/table? ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﺼ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﻀ‬‫ﹶﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬-Detached Pronoun (1) ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﺼ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﻀ‬‫ﹶﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ is a type of ism that is used to indicate upon the  ‫ﺏ‬ِ‫ﺀ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻏ‬ (Absent), or the  ‫ﺐ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻃ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺨ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ (Addressed), or the  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻠ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻜ‬‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ (Speaker). (2) ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﺼ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﻀ‬‫ﹶﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ you can begin a sentence with it. ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﺼ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﻀ‬‫ﹶﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺎ‬‫ﻧ‬‫ﺃ‬ - I ِ‫ﺖ‬‫ﻧ‬‫ﺃ‬ - You ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻫ‬ - It / She ‫ﻮ‬ ‫ﻫ‬ - He/It ‫ﺖ‬‫ﻧ‬‫ﺃ‬ - You
  • 14. 14 (3) ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﺼ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﻀ‬‫ﹶﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ is a type of a ‫ﺃ‬‫ﺪ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ (4) ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﺼ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﻀ‬‫ﹶﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ is ٌ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻓ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﻣ‬ (definite). 5) The dhameer ‫ﻮ‬ ‫ﻫ‬ and ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻫ‬ can be used for those who possess intellect and things that do not possess intellect. If they are used for the latter they will have the meaning ‘it’. ‫ﻦ‬‫ﻳ‬‫ﺃ‬ ‫ُ؟‬‫ﺔ‬‫ﺷ‬ِ‫ﺀ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻋ‬ Where is ‘Aaisha? ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻫ‬ ِ‫ﺔ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻓ‬‫ﺮ‬ ‫ﻐ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻓ‬ is in the room She ‫ﻦ‬‫ﻳ‬‫ﺃ‬ ‫ُ؟‬‫ﺔ‬‫ﻋ‬‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﺴ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ Where is the watch? ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻫ‬ ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬ ‫ﺴ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ ‫ﹶﻰ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻋ‬ bed is on the It
  • 15. 15 The table below shows the properties of ُ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ‫ﺼ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﺭ‬ِ‫ﺀ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﻀ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ (the Detached Pronouns):  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﺪ‬‫ﻋ‬ Number  ‫ﺲ‬‫ﻨ‬ِ‫ﺟ‬ Gender ‫ﱡ‬ ‫ﻝ‬ ‫ﺪ‬‫ﻳ‬ ‫ﹶﻰ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻋ‬ Indicates upon ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﺼ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﻀ‬‫ﹶﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ Detached Pronoun  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ (1)  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻛ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺬ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ Male  ‫ﺏ‬ِ‫ﺀ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻐ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ - The Absent ‫ﻮ‬ ‫ﻫ‬ - It / He ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺩ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ (1) ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺚ‬ ‫ﻧ‬‫ﺆ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ Female ُ‫ﺔ‬‫ﺑ‬ِ‫ﺀ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻐ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ - The Absent ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻫ‬ - She/It  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ (1) ‫ﱠﺮ‬ ‫ﻛ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺬ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ Male  ‫ﺐ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻃ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺨ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ - The Addressed ‫ﺖ‬‫ﻧ‬‫ﺃ‬ - You ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺩ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ (1) ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺚ‬ ‫ﻧ‬‫ﺆ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ Female ُ‫ﺔ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻃ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺨ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ - The Addressed ِ‫ﺖ‬‫ﻧ‬‫ﺃ‬ - You  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ (1)  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻛ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺬ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺚ‬ ‫ﻧ‬‫ﺆ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﻭ‬  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﱢ‬ ‫ﻠ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻜ‬‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ - The Speaker ‫ﺎ‬‫ﻧ‬‫ﺃ‬ - I/Me
  • 16. 16 ِ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬ ‫ﺼ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ ‫ﻦ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬  ‫ﻉ‬‫ﻮ‬ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﻣ‬ (Prevented from Tanween) is a Term that is used for a particular group of nouns which do not accept tanween and when they are in a state of  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﻣ‬ (kasra) they take Fathah. This particular group of nouns further divides up into many categories and from them is the category known in the Arabic language as: ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﻐ‬ِ‫ﺑ‬ ِ‫ﺚ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻧ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﺄ‬‫ﱠ‬  ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ ‫ﻊ‬‫ﻣ‬ُ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ ٍ‫ﻒ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﺃ‬ Female Names Without Alif This category contains Female Names which do not accept tanween but there is a condition ' ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻁ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺷ‬ ' for them not accepting tanween and that is, that the names are made up of more than 3 letters. This category of names is divided up into into 3 types with regards to their femininity.  ‫ﻉ‬‫ﻮ‬ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﻣ‬ ِ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬ ‫ﺼ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ ‫ﻦ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺰ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﺣ‬  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﻳ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻣ‬ ‫ﺔ‬‫ﻤ‬ِ‫ﻃ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻓ‬ ُ
  • 17. 17 The ‫ﺓ‬ ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻃ‬‫ﻮ‬ ‫ﺑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻣ‬ (Round Taa) is a letter that is added at the end of an ism and it signifies femininity of a word. The diagram above shows that there are 3 categories of femininity in female names without alif: 1) In wording and meaning - names which are feminine in their wording i.e. they end in taa marboota and in their meaning i.e. they are names which are used for females. 2) In meaning - names which are used for females but not feminine in wording. 3) In wording - names which are feminine in wording but not meaning, they are names which are used for males. The origin of nouns ending with the ‫ﺓ‬ ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻃ‬‫ﻮ‬ ‫ﺑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻣ‬ (Round Taa) is only to distinguish the feminine from the masculine. And you will mostly find that with the  ‫ﺕ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻔ‬ِ‫ﺻ‬ (Adjectives) i.e.  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻛ‬ / ٌ‫ﺔ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻛ‬ (Generous, Noble). ُ ِْ ‫ا‬ - Femininity ِ َْ (In)Wording- ‫ي‬ِ !َ ْ#َ $ (In)Meaning- ‫ي‬ِ !َ ْ#َ $ َْ َ ‫و‬ ِ - (In)Meaning and Wording  ‫ﺐ‬‫ﻨ‬‫ﻳ‬‫ﺯ‬، ‫ﻢ‬‫ﻳ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻣ‬ ‫ﺔ‬‫ﻨ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬‫ﺁ‬ ‫ﺔ‬‫ﻤ‬ِ‫ﻃ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻓ‬،ُ ُ ‫ﺔ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻃ‬،‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺰ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﺣ‬ ُ
  • 18. 18  ‫ﻒ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ : The Definition ‫ﻌ‬ِ‫ﻔ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﺿ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ - ِ‫ﻢ‬‫ﱡ‬ ‫ﻠ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻜ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ ِ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻣ‬‫ﺯ‬ ‫ﹶ‬‫ﻞ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻗ‬ ‫ﻱ‬ِ‫ﺬ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ِ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻣ‬ ‫ﺰ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻓ‬ ‫ﻊ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻗ‬‫ﻭ‬ ٍ‫ﺙ‬‫ﺪ‬‫ﺣ‬ ‫ﹶﻰ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻋ‬ ‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﺎ‬‫ﻣ‬ . The Past Verb-that which indicates upon an event/happening taking place in the time which is before the time of speaking/conversation. ‫؟‬ ‫ﺱ‬‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﻋ‬ ‫ﻦ‬‫ﻳ‬‫ﺃ‬ Where is Abbaas? ‫ﺐ‬‫ﻫ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬ ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺪ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﳌ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺇﱃ‬ to the head teacher He went For every action we have a doer or the one who performs the action. In Arabic the doer of the action is called ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬‫ﻋ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ (al-faa’il).  ‫ﻒ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ : The Definition ‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻋ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﻮ‬ ‫ﻫ‬  ‫ﻪ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻠ‬‫ﻌ‬ِ‫ﻓ‬  ‫ﻪ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻗ‬  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻛ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﺬ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻉ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻓ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ . ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻋ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ (the Doer) is an ism which is  ‫ﻉ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻓ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ takes dhammah or dhammataan on the last letter and mentioned before it is its ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻞ‬‫ﻌ‬ِ‫ﻓ‬ verb. ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬‫ﻌ‬ِ‫ﻔ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ - The Verb/Action ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬‫ﻌ‬ِ‫ﻔ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻣ‬‫ﺍﻷ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬‫ﻌ‬ِ‫ﻔ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻉ‬ِ‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻀ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﺿ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬‫ﻌ‬ِ‫ﻔ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ The Past Verb The Present Verb The Command Verb ‫ﺐ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻛ‬ - He Wrote  ‫ﺐ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻜ‬‫ﻳ‬ - He Writes ‫ﺐ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻛ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺍ‬ - (you)Write!
  • 19. 19  ‫ﻉ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻓ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻣ‬ ‫ﺐ‬‫ﻫ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬ ِ‫ﺪ‬ِ‫ﺠ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﹶﻰ‬‫ﻟ‬ِ‫ﺇ‬  ‫ﺪ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺣ‬ Haamid went to the mosque ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬‫ﻌ‬ِ‫ﻓ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻋ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﻣ‬ ٍ‫ﺽ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻣ‬ You will find that ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻋ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ is not always apparent after the verb ‫ﺐ‬‫ﻫ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬. That is because in the past-tense verbs for the Male Absent if ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻋ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ is not apparent then the  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺿ‬ (pronoun) ' ‫ﻮ‬ ‫ﻫ‬ ' (He) will be ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻋ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬. And this dhameer is known as  ‫ﺮ‬ِ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺴ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﻀ‬‫ﹶﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ (The Hidden Dhameer), you will not see it in writing or pronounce it even though it is there. ‫ﻦ‬‫ﻳ‬‫ﺃ‬ ‫؟‬ ‫ﺪ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺤ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ Where is Muhammad? ‫ﺝ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺧ‬ ِ‫ﺪ‬ِ‫ﺠ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﻦ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬ left from the mosque He
  • 20. 20 The four signs of an ism There are 4 signs by which an ism is known, and you will not find these signs entering upon the verbs or particles/letters, so they are specific to the nouns. These 4 signs can be used to distinguish between the ٌ ‫ﺀ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﺳ‬‫ﺃ‬ (nouns) and the ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻓ‬‫ﺃ‬ (verbs) and  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺮ‬ ‫ﺣ‬ (particles). (1) The first sign is that the ism accepts  ‫ﻦ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﻮ‬‫ﻨ‬‫ﺗ‬ (tanween). (2) The second sign is that ‫ﹾ‬‫ﻝ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ (alif and laam) can enter upon the ism. (3) The third sign is that  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺮ‬ ‫ﺣ‬ (particles of jarr) can enter upon the ism. (4) The fourth sign is that the ism can take  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ (kasrah/kasrataan) on the last letter.  ‫ﻦ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﻮ‬‫ﻨ‬‫ﺗ‬ ‫ﹾ‬‫ﻝ‬‫ﺍ‬ ِ‫ﺪ‬ِ‫ﺠ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻓ‬ ‫ﱠﻰ‬ ‫ﻠ‬‫ﺻ‬  ‫ﺪ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺤ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ Muhammad prayed in the mosque  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ (kasrah)  ‫ﺕ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻣ‬‫ﻼ‬‫ﻋ‬ ِ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ ) ٤ (  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ - ِ - ٍ  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺮ‬ ‫ﺣ‬  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﹾ‬‫ﻝ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻦ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﻮ‬‫ﻨ‬‫ﺗ‬ – ٌ – ٍ - ً
  • 21. 21 ) ٥ (  ‫ﺲ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺨ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﺱ‬‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﺪ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ ُ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻓ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺿ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ : ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻫ‬ ‫ﻰ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺴ‬ ‫ﻳ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻝ‬ ‫ﻭ‬َ‫ﻷ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ ، ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ِ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬ ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺪ‬‫ﻘ‬‫ﺗ‬ ‫ﹶﻰ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻋ‬ ِ‫ﻦ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ ‫ﻦ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﺑ‬ ٌ‫ﺔ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﺴ‬ِ‫ﻧ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻀ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ ‫ﻰ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺴ‬ ‫ﻳ‬ ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻧ‬‫ﱠﺎ‬ ‫ﺜ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﻭ‬ ِ‫ﻪ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻟ‬ِ‫ﺇ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻀ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ . ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻓ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺿ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ ُ (al-idhaafah) is a relationship between two nouns with a hidden particle of jarr, the first noun is called  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻀ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ (mudhaaf) and the second noun is called ِ‫ﻪ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻟ‬ِ‫ﺇ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻀ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ (mudhaaf ilaih). ُ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻓ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺿ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﹶﺍﺍ‬‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬ ‫ﻒ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﺗ‬  ‫ﺪ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻔ‬ ‫ﺗ‬ ‫ﻀ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻪ‬‫ﺼ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﺼ‬‫ﺨ‬‫ﺗ‬ ‫ﻭ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺃ‬ ِ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺎ‬ . This Particular idhaafah gives benefit by giving  ‫ﻒ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﺗ‬ (to make definite) to the mudhaaf or  ‫ﺺ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﺼ‬‫ﺨ‬‫ﺗ‬ (to narrow down/particularise). Meaning, if the ِ‫ﻪ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻟ‬ِ‫ﺇ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻀ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ is ٌ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻓ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﻣ‬ (definite) then the  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻀ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ will become ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻓ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﻣ‬, if the ِ‫ﻪ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻟ‬ِ‫ﺇ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻀ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ is ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺮ‬ِ‫ﻜ‬‫ﻧ‬ (indefinite) then the  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻀ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ will be particularised or not so general but it will not be ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻓ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﻣ‬ (definite). ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻓ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺿ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ ُ  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻀ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ ِِ‫ﻪ‬‫ﺇﻟﻴ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻀ‬ ‫ﻣ‬  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺘ‬ِ‫ﻛ‬ ٍ‫ﺪ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺤ‬ ‫ﻣ‬
  • 22. 22  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻀ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ ِ‫ﻪ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻟ‬ِ‫ﺇ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻀ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ ‫ﹶﺍ‬‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬ ِ‫ﺱ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﺪ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺘ‬ِ‫ﻛ‬ This is the teacher’s book ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻓ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﻣ‬ ٌ ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﺔ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻓ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﻣ‬ The Idhafaah construction has a  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬ which is omitted/hidden. This  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬ gives meaning to the Idhaafah, there are 3 different  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺮ‬ ‫ﺣ‬ that an Idhaafah can have, (1) ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻓ‬ (in), ‫ﻦ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬ (from/part of) and  ‫ﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﻼ‬ (ِ‫ﻝ‬) (for/belonging to). At the moment we have only taken one meaning of the Idhaafah the  ‫ﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﻼ‬  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬ ) ِ‫ﻝ‬ ( which has the meaning of, for/belonging to/possession. So when we say ٍ‫ﺪ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺤ‬ ‫ﻣ‬  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺘ‬ِ‫ﻛ‬ it literally means, ‘the book belongs to Muhammad or Muhammad’s book ) ٍ‫ﺪ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺤ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺘ‬ِ‫ﻛ‬ ( .  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ) ‫ﺍﻟﻼﻡ‬ (  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺘ‬ِ‫ﻛ‬ ٍ‫ﺪ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺤ‬ ‫ﻣ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻀ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ِ‫ﻪ‬ِ‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻟ‬ِ‫ﺇ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻀ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﺀﺋ‬‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﺎ‬‫ﻤ‬  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﻣ‬ – Always Majroor ‫ﻻ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻥ‬ ‫ﻮ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﻳ‬ – Does not accept tanween ‫ﻻ‬ ‫ﹾ‬‫ﻝ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﻘ‬‫ﻳ‬ – Does not accept alif laam
  • 23. 23 ‫ﻙ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﻫ‬ - ) over there ( - ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬ ِ‫ﺪ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻌ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ِ‫ﻥ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻜ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬ ِ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺷ‬ ‫ﻙ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﻫ‬ is a noun which is used to indicate/point to a place that is distant or far. ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﺜ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬ : ‫ٍ؟‬‫ﺪ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺤ‬ ‫ﻣ‬  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺘ‬ِ‫ﻛ‬ ‫ﻦ‬‫ﻳ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺃ‬ Where is Muhammad’s book? ‫ﻮ‬ ‫ﻫ‬ ِ‫ﺐ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻜ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﹶﻰ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻋ‬ ‫ﻙ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﻫ‬ over there It is on the table ‫ﺖ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﺗ‬ - (under) ِ‫ﻥ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻜ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬ / ِ‫ﻥ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻜ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻇ‬ )  ‫ﻩ‬‫ﺪ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﺑ‬ ‫ﺎ‬‫ﻣ‬  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬ ‫ﻳ‬ ( ِ‫ﻥ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻜ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬ is a noun of place and the ism that follows it is majroor. ُ‫ﺔ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻘ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺖ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﺗ‬ ِ‫ﺐ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻜ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ The bag is under the table The particle ‫ﺎ‬‫ﻳ‬ (O!) is used when we want to call somebody and the person we are calling is the ism which comes after this particle and it is known as ‫ﻯ‬‫ﺩ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ (the one being called). There are 5 types of ‫ﻯ‬‫ﺩ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬, we will study 3 for now.  ‫ﺱ‬‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﻋ‬ ‫ﺎ‬‫ﻳ‬  ‫ﺱ‬‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﻋ‬ - ‫ﻯ‬‫ﺩ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺎ‬‫ﻳ‬ - ‫ﺍ‬‫ﺪ‬ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬ ِ‫ﺀ‬ O- Particle of calling Abbaas- The one being called
  • 24. 24 ‫ﻯ‬‫ﺩ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ) ١ (  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺩ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ :  ‫ﺪ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺤ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ ‫ﺎ‬‫ﻳ‬  ‫ﺱ‬‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﻋ‬، ‫ﺪ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺣ‬، The first type is when we call somebody by their name i.e. O Muhammad!, Haamid!, ‘Abbaas!, and so on. ) ٢ ( ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺩ‬‫ﻮ‬ ‫ﺼ‬‫ﻘ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺮ‬ِ‫ﻜ‬ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ : ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺫ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺳ‬‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﺎ‬‫ﻳ‬ ،‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ ‫ﺟ‬‫ﺭ‬ ، The second type is when we call somebody and we intend a particular or specific person i.e. O Teacher!, Man!, and so on. ) ٣ (  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻀ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ : ‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻠ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ ‫ﺪ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﻋ‬ ‫ﺎ‬‫ﻳ‬ ِ‫ﻪ‬ ٍ‫ﺪ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺧ‬ ‫ﺖ‬‫ﻨ‬ِ‫ﺑ‬، The third type is when the one being called is mudhaaf i.e. O ‘Abdallaahi!, O Daughter of Khaalid!, and so on. It is important to note that the first and the second types of ‫ﻯ‬‫ﺩ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ end in one dhamma, not tanween. As for the third type then the Mudhaaf will be  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﻮ‬ ‫ﺼ‬‫ﻨ‬‫ﻣ‬ (take Fathah on the last letter). The words  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬ and  ‫ﻦ‬‫ﺑ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬ begin with hamzatu l-wasl. When preceded by a word the kasrah (ِ-) is dropped in pronunciation, i.e. .ِ‫ﺱ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﺪ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﺐ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻃ‬ ٍ‫ﻝ‬‫ِﻼ‬‫ﺑ‬  ‫ﻦ‬‫ﺑ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﻭ‬ ،‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻝ‬‫ِﻼ‬‫ﺑ‬ ِ‫ﺐ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﺒ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻄ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﻭ‬ ،  ‫ﺐ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﺒ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻃ‬ ِ‫ﺱ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﺪ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻦ‬‫ﺑ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬
  • 25. 25 ) ٦ (  ‫ﺱ‬ِ‫ﺩ‬‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﺴ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬  ‫ﺱ‬‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﺪ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ ِ‫ﻩ‬ِ‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬ ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﺓ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻜ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬ is an iron This ‫ﹾ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻫ‬ - ِ‫ﻪ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﺒ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ِﻠ‬‫ﻟ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬ Letter to bring to attention or alert  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬ ِ‫ﻪ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﺒ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ِﻠ‬‫ﻟ‬ is a letter that is used to alert or to bring to attention the person who is being addressed and it is mostly connected to ِ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺷ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ ُ ‫ﺀ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﺳ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺃ‬ (nouns of indication). ِ‫ﻩ‬ِ‫ﺫ‬ ِ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺷ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬ Noun of Indication ‫ِﻩ‬‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬is pronounced as ِ‫ﻩ‬ِ‫ﺫ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻫ‬ but it is written without the first alif. The ِ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺷ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬ is used to point or indicate to people, animals, objects things which can be felt or touched and can also indicate to things that have meaning such as ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺪ‬ِ‫ﻋ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻗ‬ ‘principle’ orٌ‫ﺔ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﺼ‬‫ﻧ‬ ‘advice’. ِ‫ﻩ‬ِ‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬ ‫ﺔ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﺼ‬‫ﻧ‬ ٌ ‫ﺔ‬‫ﻌ‬ِ‫ﻓ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻧ‬ ٌ - This advice is beneficial. The table below shows the properties of ِ‫ﻩ‬ِ‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬. Indicates,points to ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺷ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﹶﻰ‬‫ﻟ‬ِ‫ﺇ‬ the near  ‫ﺐ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻘ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ the feminine ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺚ‬ ‫ﻧ‬‫ﺆ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ the singular or (non-intelligent plurals)  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻔ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬
  • 26. 26 The  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬ ِ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺷ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ is ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻓ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﻣ‬ ٌ (definite). It can be used to indicate or point to those possessing intellect ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻗ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻋ‬ or things that do not possess intellect ٍ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻗ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻋ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻏ‬. -Generally words ending in ‫ﺓ‬ (taa marboota) are regarded as feminine so when we indicate to them we use the  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬ ِ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺷ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ ِ‫ﻩ‬ِ‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬ . However there are exceptions to this, (refer to lesson 4 under ‘types of femininity’). ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﺜ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬ : ‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﻴ‬‫ﺳ‬ ِ‫ﻩ‬ِ‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬ ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﺓ‬ ‫ﺟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﺩ‬ ِ‫ﻩ‬ِ‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺔ‬ ٌ This is a car and this is a bike. -Body parts that are in pairs are regarded as feminine. ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﺜ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬ : ِ‫ﻩ‬ِ‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬ ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻥ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺫ‬‫ﺃ‬ ِ‫ﻩ‬ِ‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬‫ﻭ‬  ‫ﻦ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﻋ‬ This is an ear and this is an eye -Also words which are particular to females are regarded as feminine. ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﺜ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬ : ِ‫ﻩ‬ِ‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬  ‫ﺖ‬‫ﺧ‬‫ﺃ‬  ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ِ‫ﻩ‬ِ‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬‫ﻭ‬ ِ‫ﺱ‬ِ‫ﺪ‬‫ﻨ‬‫ﻬ‬  ‫ﺖ‬‫ﻨ‬ِ‫ﺑ‬ ِ‫ﻡ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻣ‬‫ﺍﻹ‬ This is the engineer’s sister and this is the imaam’s daughter. ِ‫ﻝ‬ -  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬ Particle of Jarr (for, belongs to, ) The particle of jarrِ‫ﻝ‬ enters upon an ism and causes it to take  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ (kasrah). ِ‫ﻟ‬ ‫ِ؟‬‫ﻩ‬ِ‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬ ‫ﻦ‬‫ﻤ‬ ِ‫ﻩ‬ِ‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬ ِ‫ﻟ‬ ٍ‫ﺮ‬ِ‫ﺳ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻴ‬ . Yaasir to belongs This ? is this Whose  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﻣ‬
  • 27. 27  ‫ﺪ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ ِ‫ﻪ‬‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﻠ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬ belongs to Allaah All Praise Note that the word  ‫ﻪ‬‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﻠ‬‫ﹶﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ becomes ِ‫ﻪ‬‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﻠ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬ by just dropping the alif and no laam will need to be added to the word.
  • 28. 28 ) ٧ (  ‫ﺪ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬  ‫ﻊ‬ِ‫ﺑ‬‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﺴ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬  ‫ﺱ‬‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﻚ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ‫ﺗ‬ - ِ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺷ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬ Noun of Indication ‫ﻭ‬ ٌ‫ﺔ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﺒ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻃ‬ ِ‫ﻩ‬ِ‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬ ‫ﻚ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ‫ﺗ‬ ٌ‫ﺔ‬‫ﺿ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ . is a nurse that This a doctor and ‫ﻚ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ‫ﺗ‬ is a noun of indication it is used to indicate/point to objects or people that are distant/far and feminine. ‫ﻚ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ‫ﺗ‬can be broken down into three parts: ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﺗ‬ - ِ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ِﺷﺎ‬‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬ Noun of indication ِ‫ﻝ‬ – ِ‫ﺪ‬‫ﻌ‬ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬  ‫ﻡ‬‫ﹶﻟﻼ‬‫ﺍ‬ The laam is for the far/distant ‫ﻙ‬ -  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻄ‬ِ‫ﺧ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬ Particle of address Some of the grammarians say that the ‘‫ﻙ‬’ particle of address also indicates upon far/distant and the ‘ِ‫ﻝ‬’ shows upon even more or increased furtherness/distance. The letter/particle of address ‘‫ﻙ‬’ is used if the person or object we are addressing is masculine.
  • 29. 29 The table below shows the properties of ‫ﻚ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ‫ﺗ‬: Indicates,points to ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺷ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﹶﻰ‬‫ﻟ‬ِ‫ﺇ‬ The far/distant  ‫ﺪ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻌ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ The feminine ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺚ‬ ‫ﻧ‬‫ﺆ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ The singular  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻔ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ All the ِ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺷ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ ُ ‫ﺀ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﺳ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺃ‬ nouns of indication are ٌ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻓ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﻣ‬ definite. The letter ‫ﻱ‬ in ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﺗ‬ is dropped when joined to the laam and kaaf and the laam takes a sukoon ‫ﹾﻚ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ‫ﺗ‬. ُ ‫ﺀ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﺳ‬‫ﺃ‬ ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ ِ‫ﺐ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻘ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬ ِ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺷ‬ ُ ‫ﺀ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﺳ‬‫ﺃ‬ ِ‫ﺪ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻌ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬ ِ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺷ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﹶﺍ‬‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬  ‫ﺪ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺤ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ ‫ﻚ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬  ‫ﺪ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬‫ﺣﺎ‬ ِ‫ﻩ‬ِ‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬ ُ‫ﺔ‬‫ﻨ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬‫ﺁ‬ ‫ﻚ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ‫ﺗ‬  ‫ﺐ‬‫ﻨ‬‫ﻳ‬‫ﺯ‬
  • 30. 30 Al-I’raab- ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻋ‬‫ﹶﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻒ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ :  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻋ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﻮ‬ ‫ﻫ‬ : ‫ﺗ‬ ِ‫ﻴ‬‫ﻐ‬ ِ‫ﻑ‬‫ِﻼ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺧ‬ِ‫ﻻ‬ ِ‫ﻢ‬ِ‫ﻠ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻜ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ِ‫ﺮ‬ِ‫ﺧ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﻭ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺃ‬  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻴ‬ ِ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ِ‫ﺔ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ‫ﺧ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺪ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ ‫ﺎ‬‫ﻬ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻋ‬ ‫ﹰ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﹾﻈ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻟ‬ ‫ﻭ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﹰ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺪ‬‫ﻘ‬‫ﺗ‬ . The Definition: The I’raab is: Changing of the endings of the words because of the changing of the active elements entering upon them (the change is) apparent or not-apparent.  ‫ﺕ‬‫ﺎﻻ‬‫ﺣ‬ ِ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ The cases of the ism  ‫ﺕ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻣ‬‫ﻼ‬‫ﻋ‬ ِ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻋ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻠ‬‫ﺻ‬‫ﺍﻷ‬ ُ The origin signs of ‘Iraab  ‫ﻉ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﻧ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺃ‬ ِ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻋ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ Types of ‘Iraab  ‫ﻉ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻓ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻣ‬ ٌ - /-ُ  ‫ﻊ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻓ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﹶﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﻮ‬ ‫ﺼ‬‫ﻨ‬‫ﻣ‬ - ً / َ-  ‫ﺐ‬‫ﺼ‬ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﹶﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﻣ‬ ٍ- / ِ-  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ The above definition for I’raab mentions the ending of words changing what is meant by this is the changing of vowel markings that are on the end or last letter of a word. It also mentions that it is the active elements that enter upon a word that cause the change at the ending of a word, an example of active elements are the  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺮ‬ ‫ﺣ‬ (letters/particles). The active element is called ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ (al-‘aamil) in Arabic and the plural is ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬. The definition also mentions that the change of a word can be apparent or not apparent. What is meant by ‫ﹶ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﹾﻈ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻟ‬ apparent change is when the vowel markings at the end of a word can be pronounced and when the vowel
  • 31. 31 markings at the end of a word cannot be pronounced then the change is‫ﺍ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺪ‬‫ﻘ‬‫ﺗ‬ not apparent. This part will be explained in more depth later. The table above illustrates types of I’raab and its origin signs.  ‫ﻊ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻓ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ (ar-raf’u) is when the end or last letter of a word takes a dhammah or dhammataan  ‫ﺖ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ /  ‫ﺖ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﺑ‬  ‫ﺐ‬‫ﺼ‬ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ (an-nasbu) is when the end or last letter of a word takes a fatha or fathataan ‫ﺖ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ / ‫ﹰ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﺑ‬  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ (al-jarru) is when the end or last letter of a word takes a khasrah or khasrataan ِ‫ﺖ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ / ٍ‫ﺖ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﺑ‬ Also when an ism is in the state of  ‫ﻊ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻓ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ (ar-raf’u) it is called  ‫ﻉ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻓ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻣ‬ (marfoo’). When an ism is in the state of  ‫ﺐ‬‫ﺼ‬ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ (an-nasbu) it is called  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﻮ‬ ‫ﺼ‬‫ﻨ‬‫ﻣ‬ mansoob). When an ism is in the state of  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ (al-jarru) it is called  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﻣ‬ (majroor). ) ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ( ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﻮ‬ ‫ﻌ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﻣ‬ ِ‫ﻪ‬ِ‫ﺑ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬‫ﻌ‬ِ‫ﻓ‬ ٍ‫ﺽ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻣ‬  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﻮ‬ ‫ﺼ‬‫ﻨ‬‫ﻣ‬  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﻣ‬ ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﺜ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬ : ‫ﻳ‬‫ﺯ‬ ‫ﺢ‬‫ﺑ‬َ‫ﺫ‬  ‫ﺪ‬ ‫ﺟ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺟ‬ ‫ﺪ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ َ‫ﺔ‬  ‫ﺴ‬‫ِﺎﻟ‬‫ﺑ‬ ‫ﻴ‬‫ﱢ‬ ‫ﻜ‬ ‫ﻦ‬ ِ Zayd slaughtered the chicken with the knife.  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ) ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ( ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻋ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﻣ‬  ‫ﻉ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻓ‬‫ﺮ‬
  • 32. 32 The example above shows the three types of I’raab ,  ‫ﺪ‬‫ﻳ‬‫ﺯ‬ is  ‫ﻉ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻓ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻣ‬ the ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻋ‬ (active element) which is causing it to be  ‫ﻉ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻓ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻣ‬ is the ٍ‫ﺽ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻣ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬‫ﻌ‬ِ‫ﻓ‬ (past tense verb) ‫ﺢ‬‫ﺑ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬ , َ ‫ﺔ‬‫ﺟ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺟ‬ ‫ﺪ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ is  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﻮ‬ ‫ﺼ‬‫ﻨ‬‫ﻣ‬ the ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻋ‬ (active element) which is causing it to be  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﻮ‬ ‫ﺼ‬‫ﻨ‬‫ﻣ‬ is the ٍ‫ﺽ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻣ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬‫ﻌ‬ِ‫ﻓ‬ (past tense verb) ‫ﺢ‬‫ﺑ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬, ِ‫ﻦ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﱢ‬ ‫ﻜ‬ ‫ﺴ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ (knife) is  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﻣ‬ the ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻋ‬ (active element) which is causing it to be  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﻣ‬ is the  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬ ) ِ‫ﺏ‬ ( . The words which fall into the definition of I’raab as mentioned above are known in Arabic as  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ (mu’rab). ُ ‫ﺀ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻨ‬ِ‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ (al-binaa) ُ ‫ﺀ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻨ‬ِ‫ﺒ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ (al-binaa) are words which do not show change in their endings and they are considered by the grammarians to be the opposite of words which take  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻋ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ (al-I’raab), as mentioned above. The words which fall into this category are called ِ َْ $ (mabni).  ‫ﻒ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﺗ‬  ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ : ‫ﺎ‬‫ﻣ‬ ‫ﻻ‬  ‫ﺮ‬ ‫ﻴ‬‫ﻐ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﻳ‬  ‫ﻩ‬ ‫ﺮ‬ِ‫ﺧ‬‫ﺁ‬ ِ‫ﺐ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﺴ‬ِ‫ﺑ‬ ِ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ِ‫ﺔ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ‫ﺧ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺪ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ ‫ﺎ‬‫ﻬ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻋ‬ . Definition of  ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﻣ‬ (mabniyy): That which it’s ending doesn’t change because of the active elements entering upon it. The definition explains that words which are  ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﻣ‬ their endings do not change because of the ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﻋ‬ (active elements) entering upon them, but rather they are built upon one ending which doesn’t change at all. However, these words can grammatically have a place in I’raab but they
  • 33. 33 will be in the position or state of  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬، ‫ﺐ‬‫ﺼ‬ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬، ‫ﻊ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻓ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ due to their place in the sentence. This point will be elaborated upon later.  ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﻣ‬ ‫ﹶﻰ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻋ‬ ..... Built upon…… ٌ‫ِﻠﺔ‬‫ﺜ‬‫ﻣ‬‫ﺃ‬ Examples  ‫ﻉ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﻧ‬‫ﺃ‬ ِ‫ﺀ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻨ‬ِ‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ Types of Al-binaa  ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﻣ‬ ٍ‫ﻥ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻜ‬ ‫ﺳ‬ ‫ﹶﻰ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻋ‬ ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻓ‬ ،‫ﻢ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﻧ‬ ،‫ﹾ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﻫﺬ‬ ،‫ﻦ‬‫ﻣ‬ ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻥ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻜ‬ ‫ﺳ‬ - - ْ ٍ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺿ‬ ‫ﹶﻰ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻋ‬  ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﻣ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺚ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﺣ‬ ، ‫ﻦ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﻧ‬  ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺿ‬ ٌ‫ﺔ‬ - - ُ  ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﻣ‬ ٍ‫ﺔ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻓ‬ ‫ﹶﻰ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻋ‬ ‫ﺖ‬‫ﻧ‬‫ﺃ‬ ،‫ﺐ‬‫ﻫ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬ ،‫ﻦ‬‫ﻳ‬‫ﺃ‬ ٌ‫ﺔ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻓ‬ - - َ  ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﻣ‬ ٍ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻛ‬ ‫ﹶﻰ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻋ‬ ِ‫ﺀ‬‫ﻻ‬ ‫ﺆ‬‫ﻫ‬ ،ِ‫ﻝ‬ ،ِ‫ﺖ‬‫ﻧ‬‫ﺃ‬ ،ِ‫ﻩ‬ِ‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬ ٌ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻛ‬ - - ِ The table above shows that words which are  ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﻣ‬ can fall into four types of endings which do not change due to the ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﻋ‬ entering upon them, rather they are fixed or built upon that particular ending. There are four possible endings, ‫َة‬ *ْ+َ ‫آ‬ ،.َ /َْ 0 ،. 1َ 2 ،ٌ ‫ن‬ْ!ُ 4ُ 5 .  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻀ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ ِ‫ﻪ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻟ‬ِ‫ﺇ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻀ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﺜ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬ : ‫ﻣ‬  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺘ‬ِ‫ﻛ‬ ‫ﻦ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ؟‬ Whose book is this?  ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﻣ‬ ٍ‫ﻥ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻜ‬ ‫ﺳ‬ ‫ﹶﻰ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻋ‬ The above example shows that the word ‫ﻦ‬‫ﻣ‬ is ِ‫ﻪ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺇ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻀ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ and we know that the mudhaaf ilaih is always majroor (takes kasrah), however the word
  • 34. 34 ‫ﻦ‬‫ﻣ‬ (who) is  ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﻣ‬ ٍ‫ﻥ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻜ‬ ‫ﺳ‬ ‫ﹶﻰ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻋ‬ (built upon a sukoon) so the ending will always show a sukoon even though it is in the position or state of  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ (al- jarr) due to its place in the sentence. So the ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻋ‬ (active element) does not affect the ending of a word that is  ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﻣ‬ (mabni).
  • 35. 35 ) ٨ (  ‫ﻦ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎ‬  ‫ﺱ‬‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﺪ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ (al-Badal)-‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﺪ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺃ‬‫ﺪ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺨ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﹶﺍ‬‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ ‫ﺟ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬  ‫ﺮ‬ِ‫ﺟ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺗ‬ . This man is a trader. ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﺪ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ (al-badal) In the above example the ism ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ ‫ﺟ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ is grammatically known as ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﺪ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ (al- badal), it used in a sentence in order to give  ‫ﺪ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻛ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﺗ‬ (emphasis) and ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﺑ‬ (clarity or explanation) to the word that precedes it. So in the above example the ism ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ ‫ﺟ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ is giving emphasis and clarity to the word ‫ﹶﺍ‬‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬, it is telling us that the one being indicated to is ‘the man’.It can also be understood that the badal is the same the thing as the word which precedes it, i.e. the man is the one being indicated to and the one being indicated to is the man. Another example can be used to explain this, if I had a book in my hand which I was indicating to and I said to my teacher, ‘this is new’ ' ‫ﹶﺍ‬‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬  ‫ﺪ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺪ‬‫ﺟ‬ ' . It would be understood that the book is new and if I was to mention the book in my sentence I would say in Arabic, ‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﹶﺍ‬‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬  ‫ﺪ‬ِ‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺪ‬‫ﺟ‬  ‫ﺏ‬‫ِﺘﺎ‬‫ﻜ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬ . By mentioning '  ‫ﺏ‬‫ِﺘﺎ‬‫ﻜ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ' , I have put a ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺩ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺯ‬ ٌ (extra or additional word in the sentence which is known as ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﺪ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ (al-badal). It is important to note
  • 36. 36 here that if I were to say in Arabic, ‘ ‫ﺏ‬‫ِﺘﺎ‬‫ﻜ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﹶﺍ‬‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬’ this would not be considered to be a complete or beneficial sentence. To make it a beneficial sentence we must add a  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﺧ‬ (khabar), as shown in the example above. The subject of ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﺪ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ and the types of al-badal will be covered later on inshaallaah. ‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻢ‬  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻮ‬ ‫ﺼ‬‫ﻘ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻮ‬ ‫ﺼ‬‫ﻘ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﺱ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﺪ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﻦ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬ ‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻜ‬‫ﻳ‬ِِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻣ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﻦ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬  ‫ﺐ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﱠﺎ‬ ‫ﻄ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ ‫ﻭ‬  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻜ‬‫ﻧ‬ِ‫ﺇ‬ ‫ﺍ‬ . The teacher is from America and the student is from England.  ‫ﺪ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺣ‬ ‫ﹶﻰ‬‫ﻟ‬ِ‫ﺇ‬ ‫ﺐ‬‫ﻫ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬ ‫ﹶﻰ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﺸ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺴ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ . Hamid went to the hospital.  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻮ‬ ‫ﺼ‬‫ﻘ‬  ‫ﻒ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ : ٌ‫ﺔ‬‫ﻣ‬ِ‫ﺯ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻻ‬  ‫ﻒ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺃ‬  ‫ﻩ‬ ‫ﺮ‬ِ‫ﺧ‬‫ﺁ‬  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬ ‫ﻣ‬  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﻮ‬ ‫ﻫ‬  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻮ‬ ‫ﺼ‬‫ﻘ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ ٌ‫ﺔ‬‫ﺣ‬‫ﻮ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﻣ‬ ‫ﺎ‬‫ﻬ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻗ‬ ‫ﺎ‬‫ﻣ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﹶ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻋ‬  ‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﺪ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻘ‬ ‫ﺗ‬ ِ‫ﺕ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻛ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻊ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺟ‬ ِ‫ﻪ‬‫ﻴ‬ . Definition: al-ismul-maqsoor, it is an ism mu’rab which has an inseparable or binding alif on its end and the letter before it takes a fatha and all the vowel markings on it are not apparent. The words ِ‫ﺇ‬،‫ﻰ‬‫ﺳ‬‫ﻮ‬ ‫ﻣ‬،‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻜ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻣ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﹶﻰ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﺸ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺴ‬ ‫ﻣ‬،‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻜ‬‫ﻧ‬ all end with an binding alif or the letter ‫ﻯ‬ which looks like the letter ‫ﻱ‬ (ya) except that it doesn’t have the two dots but it is pronounced as an alif. Also the ismul-maqsoor is  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ (mu’rab) it takes  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻋ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ (al-I’raab) but the I’raab is  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺪ‬‫ﻘ‬‫ﺗ‬ (taqdeer) not apparent. The examples above illustrate this, the ismul-maqsoor (nouns
  • 37. 37 ending with the binding alif at the end) are preceded by  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺮ‬ ‫ﺣ‬ but the change caused by the  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺮ‬ ‫ﺣ‬ is not apparent, the case of  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ (al- jarr) cannot be seen. The Ismul-maqsoor falls into one of the categories or types of words where the I’raab is ‫ﺍ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺪ‬‫ﻘ‬‫ﺗ‬ (please refer back to the definition of I’raab).
  • 38. ‫ا‬ ‫ن‬ ‫ا‬ ‫ا‬ ~~ ‫ﹸﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﹶﻭﺍ‬‫ﺨ‬َ‫ﺃ‬  ‫ﻭ‬  ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺇ‬ ~~ ‘Inna and its likes ‫ﹸﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﹶﻭﺍ‬‫ﺨ‬َ‫ﺃ‬  ‫ﻭ‬  ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺇ‬ :  ‫ﻥ‬ِ ‫ﺇ‬  ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺃ‬: :  ‫ﻥ‬ِ ‫ﻜ‬‫ﻝ‬  ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺃ‬  ‫ﻥ‬ِ ‫ﻜ‬‫ﻝ‬  ‫ﻥ‬ِ ‫ﺇ‬ ‫ﱠ‬ ‫ل‬ ‫ﻌ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬ ‫ﹶ‬‫ﺕ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬  ‫ﻥ‬َ‫ﺄ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻜ‬  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﹶﺒ‬‫ﺨ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﻊ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬  ‫ﻭ‬  ‫ﻡ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ﺍﻹ‬  ‫ﺏ‬ِ ‫ﺼ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻨ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﻫﻲ‬ . They make the ism (noun) mansoob (accusative) take a fatha, and make the khabar marfoo’ (nominative take a damma). Indeed/verily Indeed/verily But
  • 39. :  ‫ﻥ‬َ‫ﺄ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻜ‬ : ‫ﹶ‬‫ﺕ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬ : ‫ﱠ‬ ‫ل‬ ‫ﻌ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬  ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺇ‬ ‫ِﻴﺩ‬ ‫ﻜ‬‫ﻭ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﺩ‬‫ِﻴ‬ ‫ﻔ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺘ‬ .  ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺎ‬‫ﺃﻴﻀ‬  ‫ﺩ‬‫ِﻴ‬ ‫ﻜ‬‫ﱠﻭ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﺩ‬‫ِﻴ‬ ‫ﻔ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺘ‬ . ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺕ‬‫ﻤ‬ِ ‫ﻠ‬ ‫ﻋ‬  ‫ﻥ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ ‫ِﺩ‬ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﺨﺎ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﻤ‬  ‫ﺽ‬ . ‘Inna brings about emphasis Anna brings about emphasis also  ‫ﻭ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬ :  ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺇ‬ َ‫ﷲ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﹸﻭ‬ ‫ﻔ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻏ‬  ‫ﺭ‬ . َ‫ل‬‫ﻗﺎ‬  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﻌ‬ ‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ِ ‫ﺔ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﺠ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ِ ‫ل‬ ‫ﻭ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ ‫ِﻲ‬ ‫ﻓ‬ ‫ِﻲ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﹶﺄ‬‫ﺘ‬  ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺇ‬ .  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﻌ‬ ‫ﺒ‬  ‫ﻥ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ ‫ِﻲ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﹶﺄ‬‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﹾﺭﻯ‬‫ﺨ‬ُ ‫ﻷ‬‫ﺍ‬ ِ ‫ل‬‫ﹾﻌﺎ‬‫ﻓ‬ّ ‫ﻷ‬‫ﺍ‬ .  ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺇ‬ comes at the beginning of a sentence and after qaala and  ‫ﻥ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ comes after the other verbs. Verily Allah is oft-forgiving I knew that verily Khaalid is ill. Would that…. (Used for seeking something impossible or in which there is difficulty) It is as if …… (for similitude or speculation) I hope…(Used for hope or regret)
  • 40.  ‫ﻭ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬ :  ‫ﻥ‬ِ ‫ﺇ‬ ‫ﻲ‬ ‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﺭ‬ َ‫ﷲ‬‫ﺍ‬ . ‫ﻲ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ُ ‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﹾ‬‫ﺕ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬‫ﻗﺎ‬ ‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺇ‬  ‫ﺩ‬ِ ‫ﻬ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺠ‬ ‫ﻤ‬  ‫ﻙ‬ . ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺕ‬‫ﻌ‬ِ ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﺴ‬  ‫ﻥ‬َ‫ﺃ‬  ‫ﻡ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﻴ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﺀ‬‫ﺠﺎ‬ ‫ﻤﺎ‬  ‫ﺱ‬ ‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ .  ‫ﻥ‬ِ ‫ﻜ‬‫ﻝ‬  ‫ﻙ‬‫ﺭﺍ‬‫ﺩ‬ِ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺴ‬ِ ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﺩ‬‫ِﻴ‬ ‫ﻔ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺘ‬ .  ‫ﻭ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬ :  ‫ﺩ‬ِ ‫ﻬ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺠ‬ ‫ﻤ‬  ‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﺤ‬ ‫ﻤ‬  ‫ﻥ‬ِ ‫ﻜ‬‫ﻝ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍ‬‫ِﺩ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺤﺎ‬ ‫ﻼ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻜ‬  ‫ﻥ‬ . Verily Allah is my lord. My mother said verily you are a hard worker. I heard that verily the teacher did not come today. laakina brings about istidraak…. Muhammad is a hard worker but Haamid is lazy.
  • 41. ١ ٢ ‫ﱠ‬ ‫ل‬ ‫ﻌ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬ ‫ﻲ‬ ‫ﺠ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﱡ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﻔ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﻨﺎﻫﺎ‬‫ﻌ‬ ‫ﻤ‬  ‫ﻭ‬ ) ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺠ‬‫ﺭ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ (  ‫ﻥ‬َ‫ﺄ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻜ‬ ِ ‫ﻥ‬‫ﹶﻴﺎ‬‫ﻨ‬‫ﻌ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﹶﻬﺎ‬‫ﻝ‬ . Conveys speculation Conveys similitude La’alla conveys hope, and its meaning is I hope. Ka’anna has two meanings  ‫ﻥ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻅ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﺩ‬‫ِﻴ‬ ‫ﻔ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺘ‬  ‫ﺩ‬‫ِﻴ‬ ‫ﻔ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺘ‬  ‫ﻪ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﺸ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﻭ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬ :  ‫ﻥ‬َ‫ﺄ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻜ‬ ِ ‫ﺠ‬‫ﺴ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﺩ‬  ‫ﺴ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﺔ‬ . It is as if the masjid is a school.  ‫ﻭ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬ :  ‫ﻙ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻨ‬َ‫ﺄ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻜ‬ ِ ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺍﻝﻴﺎﺒﺎ‬  ‫ﻥ‬ِ ‫ﻤ‬ . It is as if you are from Japan. I hope that the teacher is in his room.  ‫ﻭ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬ : ‫ﱠ‬ ‫ل‬ ‫ﻌ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬  ‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﺱ‬ ِ ‫ﻪ‬ِ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻏ‬ ‫ِﻲ‬ ‫ﻓ‬ .
  • 42. ‫ﹶ‬‫ﺕ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬ ‫ل‬‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﺤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺴ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻁ‬  ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﻫ‬  ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﱢﻲ‬ ‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﺩ‬‫ِﻴ‬ ‫ﻔ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺘ‬ .  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﺴ‬ ‫ﻋ‬ ِ ‫ﻪ‬‫ِﻴ‬ ‫ﻓ‬ ‫ﻤﺎ‬  ‫ﻭ‬ .  ‫ﻭ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬ : - seeking of the impossible) ِْ َ ْ ُ ‫ا‬ ُ َ َ ( ‫ﹶ‬‫ﺕ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬ ‫ﱠﺒﺎ‬ ‫ﺸ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﺏ‬  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﻌ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ .  ‫ﻭ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬ : - that in which there is difficulty) ٌ ْ ُ ِ ِ ( ‫ﹶ‬‫ﺕ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺎ‬‫ﻬ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﺠ‬  ‫ﻥ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﻴ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ِﻲ‬ ‫ﻝ‬ . Would that I have a million pounds! Layta brings about hope, and it is seeking the impossible and that in which there is difficulty. Would that youth would return!
  • 43. ~~ ‫ﹸﻭ‬ ‫ﺫ‬ ~~ ‫ﹸﻭ‬ ‫ﺫ‬ . ‫ﻨﺎﻫﺎ‬‫ﻌ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ )  ‫ﺏ‬ِ ‫ﺤ‬‫ﺼﺎ‬ ( ِ ‫ﻪ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﻠ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﱢﻱ‬ ‫ﺫ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﻡ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ﺍﻻ‬  ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻑ‬‫ﻀﺎ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺎ‬‫ِﻤ‬ ‫ﺌ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﹸﻭ‬ ‫ﺫ‬  ‫ﻭ‬  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﺠ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ِ ‫ﺔ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻓ‬‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﻀ‬ِ ‫ﻹ‬‫ِﺎ‬ ‫ﺒ‬ .  ‫ﻭ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬ : ‫ﺘﻌﺎﻝﻰ‬ ‫ﻗﺎل‬ : }  ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺇ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻕ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺯ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﻫ‬ َ‫ﷲ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﹸﻭ‬ ‫ﺫ‬  ‫ﻭ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻘ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ِ ‫ﺓ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﻥ‬ { The different forms ‫ﹸﻭ‬ ‫ﺫ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﻭ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺕ‬‫ﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺕ‬‫ﹶﻭﺍ‬‫ﺫ‬ Dhu: its meaning is possessor/owner, and it is always mudaaf (possessed) and the noun which is next to it is genitive (majroor), by construction. Allah the most high says (translated meaning): ‘Verily Allah he is the sustainer, the possessor of might and power’ For feminine plural  ‫ﻊ‬‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﺠ‬ ِ ‫ﺙ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻨ‬َ‫ﺅ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ِﻠ‬ ‫ﻝ‬ For feminine singular ‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ِ ‫ﺙ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻨ‬َ‫ﺅ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ِﻠ‬ ‫ﻝ‬ For masculine plural ‫ﻊ‬‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﺠ‬ ‫ﱠﺭ‬ ‫ﻜ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ِﻠ‬ ‫ﻝ‬ For masculine singular ‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ِ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻜ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ِﻠ‬ ‫ﻝ‬
  • 44.  ‫ﺏ‬ِ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﱠﺎ‬ ‫ﻁ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻫﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﹸﻭ‬ ‫ﺫ‬ ‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ ‫ﻋ‬ ٍ ‫ﻡ‬  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﱡﻼ‬ ‫ﻁ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ِ ‫ﺀ‬‫ُﻻ‬ ‫ﺅ‬‫ﻫ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﻭ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬ ‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ ‫ﻋ‬ ٍ ‫ﻡ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﺒ‬ِ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﱠﺎ‬ ‫ﻁ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ِ ‫ﻩ‬ِ ‫ﺫ‬‫ﻫ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺕ‬‫ﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ ‫ﻋ‬ ٍ ‫ﻡ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺕ‬‫ِﺒﺎ‬ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﱠﺎ‬ ‫ﻁ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ِ ‫ﺀ‬‫ُﻻ‬ ‫ﺅ‬‫ﻫ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺕ‬‫ﹶﻭﺍ‬‫ﺫ‬ ‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ ‫ﻋ‬ ٍ ‫ﻡ‬ These students (female pl.) possesses knowledge This student (female sig.) Posseses knowledge These students (male pl.) posses knowledge This student (male sig.) posses knowledge
  • 45. ~~ ‫ﻡ‬َ‫ﺃ‬  ‫ﻭ‬ ‫َﻭ‬‫ﺃ‬ ~~ ) ‫ﻡ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ ( ِ ‫ﻡ‬‫ﹾﻬﺎ‬‫ﻔ‬ِ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ِﻺ‬ ‫ﻝ‬ .  ‫ﻭ‬ ) ‫َﻭ‬‫ﺃ‬ ( ِ ‫ﻡ‬‫ﹾﻬﺎ‬‫ﻔ‬ِ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ﺍﻹ‬ ِ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻐ‬ِ ‫ﻝ‬ .  ‫ﻭ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬ : َ‫ﺃ‬ ِ ‫ﺩ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻨ‬ِ ‫ﻬ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﻥ‬ِ ‫ﻤ‬ َ‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﹶ‬‫ﺕ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﻡ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ ‫؟‬ ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺘﺎ‬‫ﺴ‬ِ ‫ﻜ‬‫ﺒﺎ‬ ‫ﻥ‬ِ ‫ﻤ‬  ‫ﻭ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬ : ‫ﹶﺍ‬‫ﺫ‬ ‫ﻫ‬ ‫ﹾ‬‫ﺫ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺨ‬ ‫َﻭ‬‫ﺃ‬  ‫ﻙ‬ِ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬ `Am is used for questioning (sentence) Are you from India or Pakistan? And ‘Aw is used for non-questioning. (sentence) Take this or that.
  • 46. ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﺔ‬َ‫ﺌ‬‫ﻤﺎ‬  ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻑ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻝ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﺔ‬َ‫ﺌ‬‫ﻤﺎ‬  ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻑ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻝ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﻥ‬ِ ‫ﻤ‬ ِ ‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﻌ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ُ ‫ل‬‫ِﺜ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ 3 ‫ﺇﻝﻰ‬ 10 ,  ‫ﻥ‬َ‫ﺃ‬  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻏ‬  ‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻫ‬ ‫ﺩ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺩ‬‫ﻌ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ . ‫ﻤﺜﺎل‬ : ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺔ‬َ‫ﺌ‬‫ﻤﺎ‬  ‫ﺠ‬ ‫ﺭ‬ ٍ ‫ل‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻑ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻝ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ َ‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍ‬ ٍ ‫ﺓ‬ . ِ ‫ﺙ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻨ‬َ‫ﺅ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﻭ‬ ِ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻜ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ِﻠ‬ ‫ﻝ‬ ‫ﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻫ‬  ‫ﻭ‬ .  ‫ﻭ‬ ) ‫ِﻑ‬ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﺍﻷ‬ ( ‫ِﻲ‬ ‫ﻓ‬ ) ‫ﻤﺎﺌﺔ‬ ( ‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻘ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﻻ‬  ‫ﻭ‬  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﹸﻜ‬ ‫ﺘ‬ . Hundred and thousand Hundred and thousand are similar to the numbers from 3 to 10, (in construction) except that their  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺩ‬‫ﻌ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ (enumerated) is singular. A hundred men A thousand women And they are (used) for masculine and feminine (enumerated). And the alif in ‫ﻤﺎﺌﺔ‬ (hundred) is written but not pronounced.
  • 47. ‫ﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﻻ‬ ِ ‫ﺏ‬ ‫ِﻲ‬ ‫ﻀ‬‫ﺍﻝﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﹾﻔﻰ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ ) ‫ﻤﺎ‬ ( ِ ‫ﺏ‬  ‫ﻉ‬ِ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻀﺎ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ) ‫ﻻ‬ .( ‫ﻤﺜﺎل‬ : ‫ﻤﺎ‬  ‫ﺱ‬‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﺩ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺤ‬َ‫ﺃ‬  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻜ‬ . ‫ﻤﺎ‬ ِ ‫ﻑ‬ ‫ﺤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ِﻝﻰ‬ ‫ﺇ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺕ‬‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﻫ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬ . ‫ﻻ‬  ‫ﺱ‬‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﺩ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫َﺤ‬‫ﺃ‬  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻜ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ . ‫ﻻ‬ ِ ‫ﻑ‬ ‫ﺤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ِﻝﻰ‬ ‫ﺇ‬  ‫ﺏ‬ ‫ﻫ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﺫ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ . The past tense is negated with ‫ﻤﺎ‬ and the present tense with ‫ﻻ‬ I did not go to the museum. Ahmad did not write the lesson. I am not going to the museum. Ahmad is not writing (up) the lesson. Example
  • 48. ‫ﹾﺒﺎل‬‫ﻘ‬ِ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺴ‬ِ ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﺤ‬ . ) ‫ﺱ‬ ( ‫ﻤﺜﺎل‬ :  ‫ﺴ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍ‬‫ﹶﺩ‬‫ﻏ‬  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﻊ‬ِ ‫ﺠ‬‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ .  ‫ﺴ‬ ُ ‫ﷲ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﺀ‬‫ﺸﺎ‬ ‫ﻥ‬ِ ‫ﺇ‬ ‫ﹶ‬‫ﺔ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻜ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ِﻝﻰ‬ ‫ﺇ‬  ‫ﺏ‬ ‫ﻫ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﺫ‬َ‫ﺄ‬ . ِ ‫ل‬‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﺼ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﺤ‬ . ) ‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﻤ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ ( ‫ﻤﺜﺎل‬ : ‫ﹸ؟‬ ‫ﺔ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻠ‬ ‫ﺠ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ِ ‫ﻩ‬ِ ‫ﺫ‬‫ﻫ‬  ‫ﻭ‬  ‫ﺏ‬‫ِﺘﺎ‬ ‫ﻜ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻫﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﻡ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻜ‬ِ ‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﻤ‬َ‫ﺃ‬  ‫ﺏ‬‫ِﺘﺎ‬ ‫ﻜ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﹶ‬‫ﻓ‬  ‫ﻭ‬ ٍ ‫ﺕ‬‫ِﻴﺎﻻ‬ ‫ﺭ‬ ِ ‫ﺓ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﺸ‬ ‫ﻌ‬ِ ‫ﺒ‬  ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﻬ‬ ‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﻤ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺔ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻠ‬ ‫ﺠ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﹶ‬‫ﻓ‬ ٍ ‫ﺕ‬‫ِﻴﺎﻻ‬ ‫ﺭ‬ ِ ‫ﺔ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺜ‬‫ﹶﻼ‬‫ﺜ‬ِ ‫ﺒ‬  ‫ﻲ‬ِ ‫ﻬ‬ . How much is this book and this magazine? As for the book, then it for ten riyals and as for the magazine then it is for three riyals.  ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﻴ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﺭ‬ َ‫ﺃ‬ ‫ِﺘﺎﺒﻲ؟‬ ‫ﻜ‬  ‫ﻥ‬‫ﻴ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺓ‬ ‫ﻭ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﺨ‬ِ ‫ﺇ‬ ‫ﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫؟‬ ‫ﻩ‬ The letter of future tense ‫ﺱ‬ The head teacher shall return tomorrow I will go to Mecca inshaa Allah The preposition of explanation ‘As for’ Example Oh brothers where is my book? Have you seen it?
  • 49. ‫ﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻬ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﹾ‬‫ﺕ‬ ‫ﺩ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﺯ‬  ‫ﻥ‬‫ِﻴ‬ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻁ‬‫ﺨﺎ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ِ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﻀ‬  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﻌ‬ ‫ﺒ‬ ‫ِل‬ ‫ﺼ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺼ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﻀ‬  ‫ﻊ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻗ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻭ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ .  ‫ﻭ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬ : ‫ﻴ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﺭ‬ َ‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﹸﻡ‬ ‫ﺘ‬ + ‫ﻩ‬ = َ‫ﺃ‬  ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﻴ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﻭ‬  ‫ﻩ‬ ‫؟‬ ِ ‫ﻡ‬ِ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﺴ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ِ ‫ﺙ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻨ‬َ‫ﺅ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﻊ‬‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﺠ‬ . When the attached pronoun of nasb occurs after the pronoun of second person, ‫ﻭ‬ is increased between them. ‫ﻡ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺘ‬ - pronoun of second person.  ‫ﻩ‬ - Attached pronoun of nasb. Increase in‫ﻭ‬ Have you seen it? (Plural masc. second person)
  • 50. ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﺓ‬‫ﹶﺴﺭ‬‫ﻜ‬ ِ ‫ﻪ‬ِ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﺼ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﻼ‬ ‫ﻋ‬ ِ ‫ﻡ‬ِ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﺴ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ِ ‫ﺙ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻨ‬َ‫ﺅ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﻊ‬‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﺠ‬  ‫ﻭ‬ . ‫ﻤﺜﺎل‬ : ‫ِﻤ‬ ‫ﻠ‬‫ﺴ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﺕ‬‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻴ‬‫ﺴ‬ ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﺕ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ِﺒ‬ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﻁﺎ‬ ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﺕ‬‫ﺎ‬  ‫ﻭ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬ : ‫ﻤﺎﻭﺍ‬ ‫ﺴ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﻭ‬  ‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻘ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﻭ‬  ‫ﺱ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﺸ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﻭ‬  ‫ﺽ‬‫ﺭ‬َ‫ﻷ‬‫ﺍ‬ ُ ‫ﷲ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﹶ‬‫ﻕ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺨ‬ ِ ‫ﺕ‬ . ) ِ ‫ﺕ‬‫ﻤﺎﻭﺍ‬ ‫ﺴ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ( ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﺓ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﹶﺴ‬‫ﻜ‬ ِ ‫ﻪ‬ِ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﺼ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﻋﻼ‬  ‫ﻭ‬  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺼ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ِ ‫ﻪ‬ِ ‫ﺒ‬ ٌ ‫ل‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﻌ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ . ‫ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ِ ‫ﻡ‬‫ﹾﻬﺎ‬‫ﻔ‬ِ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ﺍﻹ‬ ِ ‫ﺓ‬ ‫ﺯ‬‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﻫ‬ ُ ‫ل‬‫ﹸﻭ‬ ‫ﺨ‬ ‫ﺩ‬ ) ‫ﺍل‬ .( Students Fem. pl. Cars Fem. pl. Believers Fem. pl. And the sound feminine plural; its sign of nasb (accusative case) is kasra. Allah created the earth and the sun and the moon and the skies. ِ ‫ﺕ‬‫ﻤﺎﻭﺍ‬ ‫ﺴ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ is an object it is in accusative case, and the sign of it being accusative is a kasra. The entering of ‘the hamza of questioning’ on al. Example
  • 51. ‫ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ِ ‫ﻡ‬‫ﹾﻬﺎ‬‫ﻔ‬ِ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺴ‬ِ ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺓ‬ ‫ﺯ‬‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﻫ‬ ‫ﹾ‬‫ﺕ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺨ‬ ‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ) ‫ﺍل‬ ( ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺓ‬ ‫ﺯ‬‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﻫ‬ ‫ﹾ‬‫ﺕ‬ ‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ) ‫ﺍل‬ .( ‫ﻤﺜﺎل‬ : ‫ِ؟‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﺤ‬ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﻊ‬‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﺠ‬  ‫ﺭ‬‫ِﺤﺎ‬ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ َ‫ﺃ‬ = ‫ﺁ‬ ‫ِ؟‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﺤ‬ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﻊ‬‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﺠ‬  ‫ﺭ‬‫ِﺤﺎ‬ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﻝ‬ ) ‫ﺃ‬ + ‫ﺍل‬ = ‫ﺁل‬ ( ‫ﺁ‬ ‫؟‬ ‫ﻡ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﻴ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﺀ‬‫ﺠﺎ‬  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﻝ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻜ‬ ‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﺩﺍ‬‫ﻋ‬َ‫ﻷ‬‫ﺍ‬ . Compound numbers When ‘the hamza of questioning’ enters upon al, the hamza of al is made to stretch. Is Bihaar (rivers) the plural of bahr (river)? Did the headmaster come today?
  • 52. ∗ ِ ‫ﻥ‬‫َﻴ‬‫ﺌ‬‫ﺯ‬ ‫ﺠ‬ ‫ﻥ‬ِ ‫ﻤ‬  ‫ﻥ‬ ‫ﻭ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻜ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻜ‬ ‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﺩﺍ‬‫ﻋ‬‫ﺍﻷ‬ . ‫ﻤﺜ‬ ‫ﺎل‬ : Eleven ‫ﻤﺜﺎل‬ :  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺸ‬ ‫ﻋ‬  ‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﺤ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ ↑ ↑ ‫ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻲ‬  ‫ﺀ‬‫ﺯ‬ ‫ﺠ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ُ ‫ل‬ ‫ﻭ‬َ‫ﻷ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻝﺠﺯﺀ‬ ∗ ِ ‫ﺢ‬‫ﹶﺘ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻜ‬ ‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﺩﺍ‬‫ﻋ‬‫ﺍﻷ‬ , ‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﺜ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﺀ‬‫ﻭﺍﻝﺠﺯ‬ ُ ‫ل‬ ‫ﻭ‬‫ﺍﻷ‬  ‫ﺀ‬‫ﺯ‬ ‫ﺠ‬‫ﻓﺎﻝ‬ ‫ِﻲ‬ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﹶ‬‫ﺔ‬‫ﺍﻝﻔﺘﺤ‬ ِ ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﺒ‬ِ ‫ﺤ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ . First part Second part Compound numbers are fixed (remain unchanged/undeclined) on fath so the first and second part like the fatha. Compound numbers are made of two parts.
  • 53. ‫ﻥ‬ِ ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻜ‬ ‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﺩﺍ‬‫ﻋ‬‫ﺍﻷ‬ 11 ‫ﺇﻝﻰ‬ 19 The numbers from 11 to 19 ∗ ‫ﻥ‬ِ ‫ﻤ‬  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺩ‬‫ﻌ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ 11 ‫ﺇﻝﻰ‬ 99  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺼ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﻤ‬  ‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺎ‬‫ِﻤ‬ ‫ﺌ‬‫ﺩﺍ‬ . ‫ﻤﺜﺎل‬ :  ‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﺤ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺎ‬‫ِﺒ‬ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﻁﺎ‬  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺸ‬ ‫ﻋ‬ . ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺎ‬‫ﻁﺎﻝﺒ‬  ‫ﻥ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﻌ‬‫ﺴ‬ِ ‫ﺘ‬  ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﻌ‬‫ﺴ‬ِ ‫ﺘ‬ . ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻜ‬ ‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﺩﺍ‬‫ﻋ‬‫ﺍﻷ‬ 11 ‫ﻭ‬ 12 The numbers 11 and 12 ∗ 11 ‫ﻭ‬ 12 : ‫ﺍﻝﺠﺯﺀ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ُ ‫ل‬ ‫ﻭ‬‫ﺍﻷ‬ ‫ﺍﻝﺠﺯﺀ‬  ‫ﻥ‬‫ﹸﻭ‬ ‫ﻜ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍ‬‫ﱠﺭ‬ ‫ﻜ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬ ‫ﻤ‬  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺩ‬‫ﻌ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻜﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍ‬‫ﺫﻜﺭ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻲ‬ The enumerated, from 11 to 99 is always single, mansoob. 99 students (male) 11 students (male) If the ma’dood is masculine then the first part and the second part are masculine.
  • 54. ‫ﻤﺜﺎل‬ : Twelve Eleven Male students Male students ‫ﻓﻲ‬ :  ‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﺤ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺎ‬‫ِﺒ‬ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﻁﺎ‬  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺸ‬ ‫ﻋ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺎ‬‫ِﺒ‬ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﻁﺎ‬  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺸ‬ ‫ﻋ‬ ‫ﹾﻨﺎ‬‫ﺜ‬‫ﺍ‬ . ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ‫ﻤﺫﻜﺭ‬ ‫ﻤﺫﻜﺭ‬ ‫ﻤﺫﻜﺭ‬ ‫ﻤﺫﻜﺭ‬ ‫ﻤﺫﻜﺭ‬ ‫ﻤﺫﻜﺭ‬ ‫ﻥ‬ِ ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻜ‬ ‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﺩﺍ‬‫ﻋ‬‫ﺍﻷ‬ 3 1 ‫ﺇﻝﻰ‬ 19 The numbers from 11 to 13 ∗ ‫ﻥ‬ِ ‫ﻤ‬ 13 ‫ﺇﻝﻰ‬ 19 ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍ‬‫ﱠﺭ‬ ‫ﻜ‬‫ﺫ‬ ‫ﻤ‬  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺩ‬‫ﻌ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻜﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ‬ , ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻑ‬ِ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﺨﺎ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭل‬  ‫ﺀ‬‫ﺯ‬ ‫ﺠ‬‫ﻓﺎﻝ‬  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺩ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﺍﻝﻤ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻕ‬ِ ‫ﻓ‬‫ﻭﺍ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﱠﺎﻨﻲ‬ ‫ﺜ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻝﺠﺯﺀ‬ ‫ﻭ‬  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺩ‬‫ﻌ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ . ِ ‫ﺙ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻨ‬َ‫ﺅ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ِ ‫ﺩ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺩ‬‫ِﻠﻤﻌ‬ ‫ﻝ‬  ‫ﺱ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻜ‬ ‫ﻌ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ . ‫ﻤﺜﺎل‬ : Thirteen Thirteen Female students Male students Masculine Masculine If the enumerated (ma’dood) is masculine, then the first part differs in gender with the enumerated (ma’dood) and the second part agrees with the ma’dood. And the opposite is in the case of the feminine ma’dood.
  • 55. ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺎ‬‫ِﺒ‬ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﻁﺎ‬  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺸ‬ ‫ﻋ‬ ‫ﹶ‬‫ﺔ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺜ‬‫ﹶﻼ‬‫ﺜ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﺒ‬ِ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﻁﺎ‬ ‫ﹶ‬‫ﺓ‬‫ﻋﺸﺭ‬ ‫ﺜﻼﺙ‬ ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ‫ﻤﺫﻜﺭ‬ ‫ﻤﺫﻜﺭ‬ ‫ﻤﺅﻨﺙ‬ ‫ﻤﺫﻜﺭ‬ ‫ﻤﺅﻨﺙ‬ ‫ﻤﺅﻨﺙ‬ feminine masculine masculine feminine